Mutoh 1324 Service Manual

Service manual
ValueJet 1304
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ValueJet 1304　Service manual
Important Notice
1. For Users in Europe
Important:
This is a Class A product approved for industrial environ-
ments. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case you may be required to take
adequate measures.
2. For Users in the United States

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
3. Trademark Mentioned in this Manual

• MUTOH, ValueJet, VJ-1304 are registered trademarks or product names of MUTOH INDUSTRIES
LTD.
• Centronics and BiCentronics are registered trademarks or product names of Centronics Data Computer
Corporation.
• Windows95, Windows98, Windows98SE, Windows NT4.0, Windows2000, Windows XP, and MS-
DOS are registered trademarks or product names of Microsoft Corporation.
• Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
• Other company and product names may be registered trademarks or product names.
• No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

transmitted in any form or by any means, except for personal use,
without the permission of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.
• The product and the contents of this publication may be changed
without prior notification.
• MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. has made the best efforts to keep this
publication free from error, but if you find any uncertainties or
misprints, please call us or the shop where you bought this equipment.
• MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. shall not be liable for any damages or
troubles resulting from the use of this equipment or this manual.
1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Warranty Limitations
1. MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. warrants part repair or replacement as a sole measure only if a failure is
found in the system or in the materials and workmanship of the product the seller produced.
However, if the cause of failure is uncertain, decide the action after due mutual consultation.
2. The warranty shall not apply to any direct or indirect loss, or compensation for the loss due to the product
that has been subject to misuse, neglect, or improper alternation.
3. The warranty period is described in the warranty certificate.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2

About this Manual
1. Purpose and Target Readers

This manual explains preparations needed before maintaining and checking operations for MUTOH Full
Color Ink Jet Printer (VJ-1304).
This manual is prepared for the maintenance personnel of this printer.
Before using this printer, fully understand the contents and directions in this manual.
2. Manual Configuration
Section Contents
1 Safety Instructions Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labeled on the printer
for the both operators of the printer and maintenance personnel.
2 Product Overview Explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
3 Specifications Explains the specifications of the printer.
4 Parts Replacement Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the service parts
of the printer.
5 Self-Diagnostic Mode Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer.
6 Maintenance Mode Explains the maintenance mode of the printer.
7 Adjustment Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.
8 Maintenance Explains daily maintenance of the printer.
9 Troubleshooting Explains troubles that may occur when using the printer and how to
solve them.
10 Appendix Explains the maintenance information and the exploded views for this
printer.
Use the built-in self-diagnostic program to locate a defective part and adjust/
check during maintenance.
3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. Manual Notation
The following symbols are used in this manual for easier understanding of the information.
Symbol Meaning
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

CAUTION your equipment
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

NOTE product
Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment

TIP
Indicates reference pages in this manual
4. Establishment Date of This Document

This document was established on September 18, 2007.
5. Firmware version covered by this document

Firmware version: Ver.1.00
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4

General Table of Contents
1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.3 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.3 Winding unit (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.4 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.4.1 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.2 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Product Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.3.1 Network Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4 Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2 Removal of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.5 Removing Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.2.6 Removing Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.2.10 Assembling of Scroller Receiver L and R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.3.7 Replacing Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-4

4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.5.2 Replacing CR Origin Point Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.5.4 Replacing T Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-460
4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

4.6.1 Replacing Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.7.2 Replacing Maintenance Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4.11 Replacing accessory unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

4.11.1 Replacing level switch (waste fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.12 Replacing Take up unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

4.12.1 Removing Tension arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.12.2 Removing take up unit fixing plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4.12.3 Removing take up unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.12.4 Replacing scroller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4.12.5 Replacing VJ take up unit CNT board assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4.12.6 Replacing CR_HP sensor, lever sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
4.12.7 Replacing peripheral devices of VJ take up unit motor assembly . . . 4-120
2-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5 Self-Diagnosis Mode
5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.2.1 Preparations on Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.5.1 Memory Size Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5.2 Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.5.4 Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.5 Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5.6 Fan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5.7 History Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.7 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.7.1 CR return position adjustment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.7.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.7.3 Skew Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.7.5 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.7.8 Test Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.8 Cleaning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-6

5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

5.9.1 Adjustment pattern ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.2 Parameter ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.3 Error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.4 Dot pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.10 Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.11 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.12 Servo Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.13 Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.13.5 General Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.14 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.15 ExControl Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

5.15.1 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5.15.2 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5.15.3 Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.15.4 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.16 PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
6 Maintenance Mode 2
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.3.1 Counter Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
2-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7 Adjustment
7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Working with Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

7.3.1 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.3 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.3.5 Firmware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.3.6 Sending Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.3.8 Date & Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.4 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7.4.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.9 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

7.9.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.10 PG Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

7.10.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.11 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-8

8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Periodical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.2.1 Periodical Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.2 Parts need to be checked or replaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3 Part Life Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4 Lubrication/Bonding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.5 Transportation of Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.2.1 Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.3.3 Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9.3.4 Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
9.3.5 Online Function Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
9.3.6 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.3.7 Troubleshooting for a dedicated network software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Jigs and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.3.1 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.4 Operation Panel Messages (Bilingual List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.5 Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
2-9 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-10

1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes.............................................................. 1- 2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions ................................................................ 1- 3
1.4 Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 1- 9
1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels......................................................... 1-9
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels........................................ 1-9
1.5 Operation Labels................................................................................... 1- 11
1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels .................................................... 1-11
1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels ................................... 1-12
1-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

1.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the meaning of safety terms for personnel who installs, operates, or maintains this
equipment, important safety instructions, and the warning labels attached to the equipment.
WARNING
Make sure to follow all instructions and warnings on this manual when installing, operating,
or maintaining the equipment.
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Safety terms in this manual and the contents of warning labels attached to the printer are categorized into the
following three types depending on the degree of risk (or the scale of accident).
Read the following explanations carefully, and follow the instructions in this manual.
Table 1-1 Safety Terms Descriptions

Safety terms Details
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

DANGER
whole or part of the product
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the
NOTE product
Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the printer
TIP
Indicates "prohibited" operations
Indicates required operations
Indicates reference page in this manual
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 1-2

1.3 Important Safety Instructions

General safety instructions that must be observed to use the equipment safely are explained below.
WARNING
Do not place the printer in the following areas. Doing so may result in the printer
tipping or falling over and causing injury.
• Unstable surfaces
• Angled place
• Areas subject to vibration by other equipment
Do not stand on or place heavy objects on your printer. Doing so may result in the
printer tipping or falling over and causing injury.
Do not cover the ventilation hole of your printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table
cloth. Doing so could obstruct ventilation and cause fire.
Do not place the printer in humid and dusty areas. Doing so may result in electrical
shock or fire.
Do not use damaged power cable. It could lead to an electric shock and fire.
Do not take out or insert power plug with a wet hand. This could lead to an electric
shock.
Make sure that the following is performed before parts replacement.

• Turn off the power of the printer.
• Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
• Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
Do not connect an earth wire to the following places.
• Gas pipe
There is a possibility of ignition and explosion.
• Earth wire of telephone cables and lightning rods
Heavy current might flow whenever a lightning strikes.
• Water pipe and faucet
The earth might not work if a plastic pipe is connected in the middle of the metal
pipe.
Do not store combustible materials on Platen while performing the heater operation.
It could lead to fire.
Do not spill flammable liquid over platen. This could lead to fire.
1-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Do not insert or drop metal or flammable objects into the printer through openings
such as a fresh air inlet. It could lead to an electric shock and fire.
When foreign substances or liquids such as water entered the printer, do not use
the printer as it is. It could lead to an electric shock and fire. Immediately turn OFF
the power switch, disconnect the power plug from the electric socket.
Be sure to use the power cable supplied with the printer. If other power cables are
used, it would cause an electric shock or fire.
Make sure to use only the specified power supply (AC 100 V - 120 V or AC 220 V -
240 V). If the power supply other than the specified voltage is used, it could cause
an electric shock and fire.
Take power for the printer directly from the power socket (AC 100 V - 120 V or AC
220 V - 240 V). Do not use complex multiple plugs on the same socket. This could
generate heat and might cause fire.
Be sure to use a dedicated power socket with earth wire for the power supply, and
connect it to the earth wire. If the earth wire is not connected, an electric shock or
fire may occur.
The waste fluid from the printer is a waste oil (waste ink) of industrial waste. Proper
waste fluid disposal according to industrial waste disposal laws and ordinances of
your local governments are required. Consign disposal of waste fluids to specialized
processor.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 1-4

CAUTION
Assembling and disassembling of the printer are possible only for the parts that
disassembling procedures are shown in this manual. Do not disassemble any frame
parts or parts that disassembling procedures are not shown in this manual.
Doing so may cause trouble that cannot be restored, as the printer is originally
assembled in the factory with a high accuracy of 1/100 mm.
Do not touch the elements on the circuit board with bare hands.
Doing so may cause static electricity and break the elements.
Do not press the transparent film on the damper assembly with your hands. Doing
so may discharge the ink filled inside the damper assembly.
Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the damper assembly.
Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get
any dust.
There are some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from
the tube outlet onto the printer or items close to the printer.
If you need to operate the printer with the cover removed for maintenance, be
careful not to get hurt by the driving parts.
Never lube the printer mechanism with lube other than that designated by MUTOH.
Doing so may damage the parts or shorten the lifetime.
If the power board assembly needs to be removed, remove the power cable and
wait for 5 minutes or more before taking it out; this will discharge the residual
electrical charge of the electrolytic capacitor.
Touching the board before the capacitor discharges may cause electric shock.
When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on a main board assembly
connector, make sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the
connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or short-circuit the
inner terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on the CR board assembly
connector, make sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the
connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or short-circuit the
inner terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing
maintenance work.
Maintenance must be done by more than two persons for the following work.
• When disassembling or reassembling the product and the optional stand
• When packing the printer for transportation
1-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Pay attention to the following points, while handling power cable.

• Do not do anything forcefully on the power cable.
• Do not keep heavy objects on the power cable.
• Do not bend, twist or pull the power cable by force.
• Do not route the power cable near heating appliances.
Pay attention to the following points while handling power supply plug. Any
mishandling of the power cable could cause a fire.
• Make sure that no foreign substances such as dust etc. are stuck to the power
plug.
• The power plug is firmly inserted to the edge of the power socket.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers when opening/closing the front cover or
maintenance cover.
While handling ink cartridge, pay attention so that the ink does not get into eyes or
stick to the skin. If the ink gets into the eyes or sticks to the skin, immediately wash
it off with water. It might possibly cause irritation and light inflammation of eyes. In
case of any abnormality, consult a physician immediately.
Do not disassemble ink cartridges. If disassembled, there is a possibility that the ink
might come into contact with eyes or skin.
Do not operate the media loading lever during initial operation. The carriage portion
may touch the pressurizing roller portion causing a malfunction.
Do not touch the media guide during printing. It is hot and may cause a burn.
Be careful that your fingers are not caught in the driven section of the winding unit.
Pay attention to the following points when you cut roll media. Mishandling the razor
blade may cause a cut on your finger or hand.
• When you hold media, do not place your finger on the media cut groove.
• Move the razor blade along the media cut groove.
Do not apply Jetwash, thinner, benzine, or alcohol to the printer parts, excluding
listed below. Such use may result in printer malfunction
• Inside the maintenance cover
• Surface of the print head
Be careful that moisture does not enter the printer. There is a possibility that electric
circuit inside the printer is short circuited.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 1-6

While cleaning with the cleaning wiper

• Do not touch the cleaning wiper and head cap unit.
Head cleaning may not be operated correctly because of the grease attached.
• Make sure to wipe the print head with a dry poly-knit wiper.
A wet poly-knit wiper may cause the print head to clog.
• Do not use clean sticks.
Attached dust may damage the print head.
Be careful the followings when cleaning the outer of the print head:
• Do not touch the print head nozzle part.
Such operation may damage the print head.
• Do not touch the tip of the clean stick.
Fat sticks to the clean stick may damage the print head.
• Do not sink the clean stick into water.
Such operation may damage the print head.
• Do not re-use any used clean stick.
Attached dust may damage the print head.
Do not slant the printer body, prop it against a wall or turn it upside down. There is
a possibility that ink inside the printer may leak. Moreover, normal operation after
shifting (to these positions) cannot be guaranteed.
Unpack or move the printer by more than two person.
When taking this printer out of the package box, make sure to remove the vinyl
sheet and hold the handles on the side of the printer. If the printer is lifted with the
vinyl sheet attached, there is a possibility that the printer falls slipping from hands
and gets damaged.
When you do not use the printer for a long period, make sure to pull out the power
plug from the power socket for safety.
Make sure to connect an earth wire to the earth connection which meets the following
standards.
• Earth terminal of power socket
• Earth wire with copper plate which is buried at 650 mm or more, deep in the ground.
• Earth terminal which grounded properly (earth resistance: 100Ω or less).
Keep the work area well-ventilated. This prevents fire and operators from feeling
sick from bad air.
Execute the following operation by more than two persons:

• Setting the winding unit.
When printing is finished, the media guide and the platen are at high temperature. Wait
until the media guide and the platen cool off.
1-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

When cleaning the printer, be sure to turn OFF the power and disconnect the power
plug.
Move the printer maintaining a horizontal position.
Be sure to operate the following before attaching option units.

• Turn the printer power off.
• Unplug the power cable.
Otherwise, the printer or computer may be damaged.
• Remove the static electricity by touching the metal part of the printer from your
cloth or body.
Electric part such as RAM may be damaged.
Do not touch the board elements when attaching option units. The elements become
high temperature and may cause the burn.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 1-8

1.4 Warning Labels

The handling, attachment locations, and types of warning labels are explained below.
Warning labels are attached to areas where care should be taken. Read and understand the positions and
contents thoroughly before maintenance operation.
1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels

Make sure to note the following when handling the warning labels.
NOTE
• Make sure that all warning labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen clearly,
clean or replace the label.
• When cleaning warning labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a solvent or
gasoline.
• If a warning label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels

The locations of warning labels are shown below.
(1) Main Body
2 1
1-9 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels

No. Warning label type
1 (T fence handling caution)
2 (Front cover open/close caution)
3 (High temperature caution)
(2) Winding unit

The locations of warning labels on the winding unit are shown below.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 1-10

No. Warning label type

1 (Catching caution)
1.5 Operation Labels

This chapter describes the operation labels including their types and attaching positions.
The operation labels are attached on the product to provide the brief instructions for the particularly important
operations. Learn the instructions and the attaching positions before operation.
1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels

Make sure to note the following when handling the operation labels.
NOTE
• Make sure that all operation labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen clearly,
clean or replace the label.
• When cleaning operation labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a solvent
or gasoline.
• If an operation label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
1-11 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels

The locations of operation labels are shown below.
Table 1-3 List of Operation Labels

No. Operation label type
1 (Roll media setting)
"Operation manual" Setting Roll Media
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 1-12

Table 1-3 List of Operation Labels (Continued)

No. Operation label type
2 (Ink arrangement)
"Operation manual" Replacing Ink Cartridges
1-13 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 1-14

2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2- 2
2.2 Features ................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.3 Part Names and Functions..................................................................... 2- 3
2.3.1 Front Section ................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section .................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.3 Winding unit (Optional) .................................................................. 2-6
2.3.4 Operation Panel ............................................................................. 2-8
2.4 Printer Status ........................................................................................ 2- 11
2.4.1 Normal ......................................................................................... 2-11
2.4.2 Setup Menu ................................................................................. 2-11
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function ............................................................... 2-11
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode ...................................................................... 2-11
2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature .................... 2-12
2-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
2.2 Features
The features of the printer are explained below.
(1) Fast Print

The new print head adopted on this printer performs fast to print images.
Also, this printer prints up to 1355.5mm (when uni-directional print mode) or 1336.5mm (when bi-directional
print mode) in width.
(2) Variety of Print Media

The height of the print head position can be set high/low, so that this model can print on the media of which
thickness is between 0.08 and 1.00 mm.
(3) Vivid Color Reproduction

For vivid color reproduction, this model has high-capacity (220 ml) 4 color ink cartridges with exclusive
smart IC chip on it. With the IC chip, you can manage the ink level of the cartridges and can get better
productivity.
Also, with the variable dot method, richer color expression can be enhanced.
(4) Multi-Heater System

The media-heating system which have been equipped to PJ series is changed to match the solvent ink. There
are 3 heaters on Pre / Platen / After positions and improved the ink flexibility and drying property.
(5) Effective Utilization of Media

The JOG function is featured, which allows to set random print start positions. Printed media can be reprinted
and blank areas on the media can be put to effective use.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-2

2.3 Part Names and Functions

Part names and functions are explained below.
NOTE
For the directions described in this document, refer to the following figure.
Upper
Rear
Left
Right
Front
Lower
2-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2.3.1 Front Section

Table 2-1 Part Names and Functions of Front Section

No. Name Function
1 Media set lever This lever is used to fix or release the media.
2 Operation panel This panel is used to set operational conditions, the status of the printer,
and other functions.
3 Front cover This cover keeps the operator safe from the drive parts of the printer while
it is operating.This is opened/closed when replacing the cutter or paper is
jammed.This should be closed during normal use.
4 Stand This stand is used to set the printer on the level surface of the floor.
5 Book holder This holder is used to store printed guide such as Quick Reference Guide.
6 Media Guide This guide is used to feed media smoothly when setting media and
printing.
7 Media cut guide This guide groove is used to cut printed media straight.
8 Pressure roller This is inside the front cover.
Presses and supports the media in the width when printing.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-4

Table 2-1 Part Names and Functions of Front Section (Continued)

No. Name Function
9 Platen This is inside the front cover.
There are heaters (platen heater) inside to dry ink.
2.3.2 Rear Section
K C M
Y
6 4 3 2
Table 2-2 Part Names and Functions of Rear Section

No. Name Function
1 AC inlet For inserting the power cable plug.
2 Network interface Connector to connect a network interface cable.
connector
3 USB connector This printer does not support the connector.
4 Scroller receiver The scroller is set here when using roll media.
5 Media feed slot Insert media from here when feeding media.
6 Ink cartridge slot This holds the ink cartridge.
7 Media guide Supports the media to be feed smoothly when media setting and printing.
There are pre heaters inside to warm the media.
8 Waste fluid tank This is a tank that contains the waste ink.
2-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 2-2 Part Names and Functions of Rear Section (Continued)

No. Name Function
9 Waste fluid valve Open this valve to discharge the waste fluid from the waste fluid tank.
In other case, close the valve.
2.3.3 Winding unit
2
9
5 10
3
1
4 8
Table 2-3 Part Names and Functions of Winding Unit

No. Name Function
1 Winding unit Winds the printed media.
2 Cushioning roller Loads the printed media to the winding unit.
3 Scroller receiver Used when setting the scroller of the winding unit.
4 Scroller release lever Releases the scroller from the winding unit, allowing you to turn the
scroller with your hand.
5 Scroller Used when winding the printed media.
6 Scroller height fixing Fix the height of the scroller receiver.
screw
7 Scroller height Adjust the height of the scroller receiver.
adjustment screw
8 Horizontal adjustment Adjust the side position of the scroller.
screw
9 Power switch Used when turning the power ON and OFF.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-6

Table 2-3 Part Names and Functions of Winding Unit

No. Name Function
10 Operation panel Used for setting operation conditions, display of unit status.
"Winding unit for VJ-1304"
2-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2.3.4 Operation Panel

The operation panel is used to set operational conditions, display the status of the printer, and set other
functions.
The names and functions of the operation keys and status lamps are explained below.
TIP
Operation manual
8, 9 10
17
13
14 15
16
11
6
12
1
5
3 4 7 2
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-8

(1) Operation Keys
NOTE
Some keys have multiple functions and names depending on the printer status (normal or setup menu
display). See "2.4 Printer Status" p.2-11 for more details.
No. Name Normal Setup menu display

1 [Menu] key Changes the LCD monitor display to Changes the setup menu display
setup menu status. status to normal status.
2 [Enter] key - - Selects the menu to be set and shifts
to the next hierarchy.
- Determines and saves the parameter
value.
[Cleaning] key If held down for 2 seconds or more, -
starts cleaning the printer head.
3 [Cancel] key - During plotting: Terminates printing - Returns to the previous menu
forcibly and deletes 1 file of hierarchy. Changed parameter values
remaining data. are disabled.
- During reception/analysis: Deletes - Changes the setup menu display
the data that has been already status to normal status.
received/analyzed and ignores 1 file
of data received after that.
-
4 [<] key Sets the media type. -Changes the setting value in the
• - The lamp for the cleaning mode following menu:
lights on (green). • Origin setting menu
[Nozzle Check] key If held down for 2 seconds or more, -
starts checking the printer nozzle.
5 [>] key Sets the cleaning mode. Displays lower rank menu items.
- The lamp for the media type lights
on (green).
6 [Backward ↑ ] key Feeds the media in the reverse -
direction.
[ + ] key - -Changes the menu in forward order.
-Changes the setting value in forward
order.
-Increases the value when inputting
setting value.
7 [Forward ↓ ] key Feeds the media in the forward -
direction.
[ - ] key - - Changes the menu in the reverse
direction.
- Decreases the value when inputting
values.
2-9 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

No. Name Normal Setup menu display

8 [Power] key Turns the printer on and off. Turns the printer on and off.
(2) LCD Monitor and Status Lamps
No. Name Color Status Function

9 Power lamp Green On The printer is switched on.
Blinking An error has occurred. The contents will be displayed on the
LCD monitor.
Off The printer is switched off.
10 Data lamp Red On - The printer is analyzing received data.
- The printer is printing data.
Blinking The printer is receiving data.
Off The printer is not receiving, analyzing or printing data.
11 High lamp Green On The print head height is set to High position.
Off The print head height is set to Low position.
12 Low lamp Green On The print head height is set to Low position.
Off The print head height is set to High position.
13 Wave lamp Red On The effect menu is set to Wave.
Off The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
14 Fine & S.Fine Red On The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
lamp
Off The effect menu is set to Wave.
15 Strong lamp Green On - The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
- When the Normal lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy.
Off - The effect menu is set to Wave.
- When the Strong lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy quality.
16 Normal lamp Green On - The cleaning mode is set to Normal.
- When the Strong lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy quality.
Off The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
17 LCD monitor - - This monitor displays the operation status and error
messages of the printer.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-10

2.4 Printer Status

The status of the printer is explained below.
2.4.1 Normal
Indicates that the printer can print when media is loaded.
Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.2 Setup Menu

Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.
The settings required for normal printing are usually made on the printer driver or application, but can also
be made using the operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function

Indicates that each settings concerning printing using the operation panel. Names and functions of the
operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"5 Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-1
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode

Indicates that each setup concerning to the life counter on this printer can be operated by using the operation
panel. Names and functions of the operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"6 Maintenance Mode 2" p.6-1
2-11 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature

This section describes how to select the language displayed in the operation panel.
Follow the steps below to select the language.
NOTE
You can choose panel language and panel temperature as follows.
Language:Japanese or English
Temperature:Celsius or Fahrenheit
1. Press [Power] key in the operation panel while

pressing [Cancel] key.
2. Press [Setting/value +] key or [Setting/value -]

key in the operation panel to modify the value.
3. To save the modified value, press [Enter] key in

the operation panel.
* panel temperature appears after panel
language. Operation is same as before.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-12

3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 3- 2
3.2 Product Specifications ........................................................................... 3- 2
3.3 Interface Specifications.......................................................................... 3- 4
3.3.1 Network Interface Specifications.................................................... 3-4
3.4 Choosing a Place for the Printer .......................................................... 3- 5
3-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the specifications of the product, optional parts, and supplies. Installation environment
requirements are also explained.
3.2 Product Specifications

(1) Main Unit Specifications
Item Specifications
Model name VJ-1304
Plotting method On-demand piezo drive
Motor driving method Firmware servo/DC motor drive
Media feeding method Multi-point pressure grid roller method
Media fixing method Pressurizing roller manual-down method
Media supply and Roll media

Front feeding/front paper ejection
ejection
Media type Tracing Paper
Roll media outer 2-inch

150 mm or less
diameter
Maximum Roll media
loadable media 19 kg (41.9 lb) or less
weight
Maximum media width 1371.5 mm (54 in.)
Maximum media Roll media

50 m (160 ft.)
length:
Maximum plot length 1355 mm (53.3 in.)
Plotting margins Roll media Top: 3mm, Bottom: 3mm, Left: 3mm, Right: 3mm
Media cutting method Manual cutting across the media
Head height adjustment 2 levels: Normal and High
Distance accuracy The larger value either ± 0.25 mm or ± 0.1% of moving distance
• Used media: Roll MF-3G
• Plot length: 1355.5 mm (4.45 ft.)
• Operating temperature: 22 to 30ºC (71.6 to 86F)
• Operating humidity: 40 to 60%
• PG: Low
• Plot mode: Graphics1
Right angle accuracy ±0.1mm or less against the moving distance (500.0mm)
• Used media: Roll MF-3G
• Operating temperature: 22 to 30ºC (71.6 to 86F)
• Operating humidity: 40 to 60%
• Plot mode: Graphics1
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 3-2

Item Specifications
CPU 64Bit RISC CPU
Memory 128MB
Command MH-RTL (RTL-PASS)
Interface Network Interface (IEEE802.3)
After-heater OFF / 30 to 50°C (86 to 122F)
Platen heater OFF / 30 to 50°C (86 to 122F)
Pre-heater OFF / 30 to 50°C (86 to 122F)
Ink Supply method Tube supply from separate four separated cartridges
Cartridge Black, cyan, magenta, yellow: 220ml ± 5ml for each color
Head life expectancy 60 billion dots per nozzle (in case of sequence discharging under the condition
of the temperature of 25ºC (77F) with no dust)
Operation environment Temperature: 20ºC (68F) to 32ºC (90F)

Humidity: 40% to 60%, with no condensation
Plotting accuracy warranty range Temperature: 22ºC (71.6F) to 30ºC (86F)

Environmental conditions
Rate of change Temperature: 2ºC/hour or less

Humidity: 5%/hour or less
Storage Without ink Temperature: -20ºC (-4F) to 60ºC (140F)

environment Humidity: 20% to 80%, with no condensation
Storage period: 6 months
With ink Temperature: -10ºC (14F) to 40ºC (104F)

Storage period: 6 months
Power source Voltage AC 90 - 132V ± 10%
Frequency 50Hz/60Hz ± 1Hz
Power During Plotting 1260W or less (when heater is ON)

consumption
During standby 40W or less (when standby heater is OFF)
Outer dimensions Height 1218mm (48 in.) * including stand
Width 1875 mm (73.8 in.)
Depth 685 mm (27 in.)
Weight Main body 58.0 kg (127.8 lb.)
Stand 21.3 kg (46.9 lb)
3-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3.3 Interface Specifications

This section explains the specification of the interfaces Supported for this printer.
3.3.1 Network Interface Specifications

Item Specifications
Network type Ethernet IEEE802.3
Network I/F 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Auto-switching
(RJ-45 connector twist pair cable)
MDI / MDI-X Auto-switching
Corresponding TCP/IP
protcol
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 3-4

3.4 Choosing a Place for the Printer

WARNING
• Do not place the printer in a location under the following conditions. Doing so may cause
the product to fall, become damaged, or cause injury.
• Unstable surfaces
• Slanted areas
• Locations that are subject to vibration from other product
• Do not stand on the printer or place any heavy objects on it.
Doing so may cause it to fall over, become damaged, or cause injury.
• Do not cover the ventilation hole of the printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth.
Doing so could prevent the printer from ventilating and cause fire.
• Keep the printer away from humid and dusty areas. Failure to do so may result in
electrical shock or fire.
(1) Installation Environment Requirements

Choose a place for printer installation following the requirements of the table below.
Table 3-1 Installation Environment Requirements List

Floor loading capability 2940Pa (300kgf/m2) or over
Electrical Voltage AC 90 V - 120 V ± 10%
specifications
Frequency 50/60Hz ± 1Hz
Capacity 10A or more
Environmental conditions Temperature Humidity
Operation 20º C (68F) to 32ºC (86F) 40% to 60%, with no condensation
environment
Plotting accuracy 22ºC (71.6F) to 30ºC (86F) 40% to 60%, with no condensation
warranty range
Rate of change 2ºC/hour or less 5%/hour or less
3-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

NOTE
• Avoid the following temperature and humidity conditions. Otherwise, Plotted images may appear
differently from what you expect.
• Places where sudden changes in temperature and humidity are expected, even though the
condition is within the range specified
• Places where direct sunlight or excessive lighting are expected
• Places where air conditioners blow directly
• MUTOH recommends that the printer should be installed where air conditioning can be adjusted
easily.
(2) Required Space

Install the printer on a flat surface that fulfills the following conditions.
• The place to install printer with the optional stand should have enough loading capacity.
NOTE
• For the printer and the optional stand, refer to"3.2 Product Specifications" p.3-2.
• When maintaining the printer, 1000 mm of space is required on the left side of the printer in
addition to the spaces shown below.
a=500mm
b=1000mm
c=1000mm
d=1000mm
e=1440mm
f=3000mm
g=2660mm
e
a
d
b
f c
g
* Do not use VJ-1304 without stand.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 3-6

4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 4- 4
4.2 Removal of Covers ................................................................................. 4- 5
4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover ................................................................ 4-6
4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit .................................................... 4-9
4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover ............................................................... 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover................................................. 4-12
4.2.5 Removing Front Cover................................................................. 4-14
4.2.6 Removing Top Cover ................................................................... 4-15
4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F ............................................................ 4-16
4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2.......................................................... 4-17
4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R) .............................................. 4-18
4.2.10 Assembling of Scroller Receiver L and R .................................... 4-20
4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components ........................... 4- 23
4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan.............................. 4-23
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket .................................................... 4-24
4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly ................................................. 4-29
4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly................................ 4-30
4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly .............................. 4-32
4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly............................................... 4-35
4.3.7 Replacing Fuse ............................................................................ 4-38
4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly............................................................. 4-41
4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components ............................. 4- 44
4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly..................................................... 4-44
4-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly...................................................... 4-47
4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale ............................................................ 4-48
4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly ................................ 4-49
4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components .............................4- 51
4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly...................................................................... 4-51
4.5.2 Replacing CR Origin Point Sensor ............................................... 4-52
4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor ............................................................... 4-54
4.5.4 Replacing T Fence ....................................................................... 4-55
4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley and CR belt ..................................... 4-58
4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly .............................................. 4-60
4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components .......................................4- 61
4.6.1 Replacing Print Head.................................................................... 4-61
4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly............................................... 4-66
4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components ..........................4- 71
4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly ...................................... 4-71
4.7.2 Replacing Maintenance Assembly ............................................... 4-76
4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper) .................................. 4-77
4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components..............................4- 79
4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly............................................ 4-79
4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly................................................... 4-82
4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly .............................................. 4-85
4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board................................................. 4-87
4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components .....................................4- 89
4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly................................................. 4-89
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-2

4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly......................................... 4-90
4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components .......................... 4- 91
4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly.................................................... 4-91
4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube ...................................................................... 4-93
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire ............................................................. 4-97
4.11 Replacing Accessory Unit.................................................................. 4- 101
4.11.1 Replacing Level Switch (Waste Fluid) ....................................... 4-101
4.12 Replacing Take Up Unit...................................................................... 4- 102
4.12.1 Removing Tension Arm ............................................................. 4-103
4.12.2 Removing Take Up Unit Fixing Plate ......................................... 4-104
4.12.3 Removing Take Up Unit Cover .................................................. 4-105
4.12.4 Replacing Scroller...................................................................... 4-108
4.12.5 Replacing VJ Take Up Unit CNT Board Assembly .................... 4-109
4.12.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor .................................. 4-117
4.12.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take Up Unit Motor assy .. 4-120
4-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on removal and replacement of service parts.
WARNING
Before starting part replacement, always perform the following operations.

• Turn OFF the machine power.
• Remove the power plug from the outlet.
Otherwise, you may suffer electric shock or the system circuit may be damaged.
• Remove any cables connected to the machine.
Otherwise, the machine may be damaged.
CAUTION
The components in the machine can be disassembled only if so instructed in this manual.
Do not disassemble the frame components and other components that are not instructed to
disassemble in the manual.
The machine has been assembled in the MUTOH factory with extremely high precision up
to 1/100mm. If disassembled inappropriately, it may not restore its normal functionality.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-4

NOTE
After replacing any service parts, perform necessary lubrication and bonding following the
instructions in section "8.4 Lubrication/Bonding" p.8-7.
Upper
Rear
Left
Right
Front
Lower
4-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.2 Removal of Covers

Before replacing any service parts in the machine, you must remove some external covers.
This section describes the procedure to remove covers.
1 9
8 (Rear side)
2
7
Table 4-1 Cover Component List

No. Part name
1 L side cover
2 Front cover
3 Media guide F
4 R side cover
5 Waste fluid bottle
6 I/H cover
7 Operation panel unit assembly
8 Media guide R2 (rear side)
9 Top cover
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-6

4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover

1. Move down the pressure lever backward.
表 4-2
No. Part name

1 1 Pressure lever cap
2 Pressure lever cap screw
2 (M4 × 10, P tight binding)
2. Remove the pressure lever cap-retaining screw (M4 × 10, P tight binding: 1).
3. Remove the R side cover outer screw (Tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
表 4-3
No. Part name

1 1 R side cover
2 Waste fluid unit cover
2 3 R side cover outer screw
(M4 × 8, P tight cup)
4-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4. Remove the waste fluid unit cover-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 2)
表 4-4
No. Part name

1
1 Waste fluid cover
2 waste fluid unit cover-retaining
screw (Tapping screw M3 × 6, S
tight cup: 2)
5. Remove the waste fluid unit cover.

6. Open the front cover.
7. Remove the R side cover inner screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black: 2).
表 4-5
No. Part name

1 R side cover
1 2 R side cover inner screw
(tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight
2 binding black)
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-8

8. Remove the R side cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, S tight cup: 2).
表 4-6
1
No. Part name
1 R side cover
2
2 R side cover rear screw
(tapping screw M4 × 12, S tight
cup)
9. Return the pressure lever forward and remove the R side cover to the upper right direction.
10. Replace the parts inside the product.
11. To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
4-9 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit
TIP
Before removing the operation panel unit, perform the following work.
• Removing the R side cover: "4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover" p.4-6
• Unlocking and moving the carriage.
1. Remove the operation panel unit tape wire (FFC).
CAUTION
• Before replacing board or connecting/removing tape wire (FFC), unplug the power cable
and leave the printer for a while. Or board may be damaged by overcurrent.
• When connecting or removing the tape wire (FFC) to the operation panel unit connector,
always pull or push the wire perpendicularly to the connector. Pulling or pushing the wire
slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the connectors, resulting in a
breakdown of the on-board devices.
• You can connect/remove the tape wire up to five times.
2. Release the tab on the rear side of the operation panel unit from the panel stay.
3
1
2
2
Insert a hand from here. bottom view

3
No. Part name

1 Operation panel unit
2 Panel stay
3 Operation panel unit-retaining tab
3. Remove the operation panel unit.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-10

4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover

1. Remove the L side cover front screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black: 2).
表 4-7
1 2
No. Part name
1 L side cover
2 L side cover inner screw
binding black)
2. Remove the L side cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
3. Remove the L side cover right screw (tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
NOTE
Before removing the scroller receiver side screw, remove the following part.
• Scroller receiver L: "4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-18
4. Remove the L side cover scroller receiver side screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black: 1).
表 4-8
1
No. Part name
1 L side cover
2
2 L side cover rear screw
(tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup)
3 L side cover right screw
4 4 L side cover scroller receiver side
screw (back side)
3 binding black)
4-11 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5. Remove the L side cover.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-12

4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover
NOTE
Before removing the ink holder (I/H) cover, remove the following parts.
• R side cover: "4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover" p.4-6
1. Remove the ink cartridge.

2. Remove the I/H cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 × 8, S tight cup: 2).
表 4-9
No. Part name

1 I/H cover
1 2 I/H cover screw
3. Remove the scroller receiver.

"4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-18
4. Remove the I/H cover side (scroller receiver side) screw (tapping screw M4 × 12, P tight binding black:
1).
表 4-10
No. Part name

1 I/H cover
2 I/H cover side screw
1 binding black)
4-13 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5. Remove the I/H cover.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-14

4.2.5 Removing Front Cover

2. Remove the front cover by pulling it toward the direction of the arrow shown below.
No. Part name

1 Front cover
2 Front cover receiver
NOTE
Do not remove the front cover by force.It may damage or deform the resin.

4-15 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.2.6 Removing Top Cover
NOTE
Before removing the top cover, remove the following parts.
• Front cover: "4.2.5 Removing Front Cover" p.4-14
1. Remove the top cover front side-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 × 5: 2).
表 4-11
1
No. Part name
1 Top cover
2 2 2 Top cover front side screw
(round head spring screw M3 × 5)
2. Remove the top cover rear side-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 × 5: 7).
表 4-12
No. Part name
2 2 1 Top cover
2 Top cover rear side screw
(round head spring screw M3 × 5)
1 2
3. Remove the top cover.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-16

4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F

1. Remove the media guide F lower-side screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk: 10).
表 4-13
No. Part name

1 Media guide F
2 2
2 Media guide F screw
(cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk)
2. Remove the media guide F top screw (platen-retaining screw NX: 4, cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk: 1) and
media guide F right cover and left cover screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk: 6).
表 4-14
2
No. Part name
3 1 Media guide F
2 Media guide F top screw
(platen-retaining screw NX)
3 Media guide F right cover and left
cover screw
3 (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3bk)
3 1
3. Remove the media guide F. In the removing process, remove the after-heater AFT_H cable assembly
inside the media guide F, and after-thermistor AFT_T cable assembly.
NOTE
The spacers are attached to the media guide F top screws except the center one. When fasten the
screws, attach the spacers.
4-17 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2

1. Remove the media guide R2-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 11). The number of
screws varies depending on models.
表 4-15
No. Part name

1
1 Rear cover
2 2 Media guide R2-retaining

2
screw
cup)
2. Remove the media guide R2 by pulling it backward.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-18

4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)

1. Remove the scroller receiver L-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 2).
表 4-16
No. Part name

1 Scroller receiver L screw
cup)
1
2 Scroller receiver L
2. Remove the scroller receiver L.

3. Remove the scroller receiver L-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 2).
表 4-17
No. Part name

1 Scroller receiver R screw
cup)
2 2 Scroller receiver R
4. Remove the scroller receiver R.

4-19 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

NOTE
There are two hole to attach the scroller receiver on the frame side. See the right of illustration below
for the hole for VJ-1304. Make sure that the part is attached to the appropriate position.
2 1
No. Part name

1 Attachment hole for scroller receiver of VJ-1304
2 Screw holes for fixing scroller receiver
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-20

4.2.10 Assembling of Scroller Receiver L and R
NOTE
Before assembling scroller receiver, remove the following part.
• Scroller receiver: "4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-18
1. Attach the two position adjustment scroller roller shafts to the part A shown below of scroller receiver L
(or R). Make sure that the attachment direction is the same in the figure below.
表 4-18
No. Part name

1 1 Scroller roller shaft R
A
2. Put the scroller receiver roller on the scroller roller shafts R.
表 4-19
No. Part name

1 Scroller receiver roller
1 2 Scroller roller shaft R
NOTE
Scroller roller shaft R is easy-to-fall. Do not let the shaft fall by pressing or slanting it with a finger.
4-21 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. From the other side of scroller receiver L (or R) explained in step 1 and 2, insert the scroller receiver R
and fix the scroll receiver roller set in step 2.
表 4-20
No. Part name

1 Scroller roller shaft R
4. Remove the position adjustment scroller roller shaft R set in step 1.
表 4-21
No. Part name

1 Remove the scroller roller
2 shaft R in this position.
2 Attached scroller receiver
roller
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-22

5. Set the scroller receiver roller to the position B and C in the figure below. Make sure that the rollers are
set on the appropriate position of the scroller receiver R (or L).
表 4-22
No. Part name

1 Scroller receiver rollers
2 Scroller receiver R
2
B C
6. From the other side of the scroller receiver R (or L) as shown below, insert the scroller roller shaft R and
fix the scroller receiver roller.
表 4-23
No. Part name

1 Scroller roller shaft R
2 2 Scroller receiver R
4-23 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components

This section describes replacement procedures of power board assembly, main board assembly, and cooling
fan.
CAUTION
When you handle a circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare hands.
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements.
4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan
(1) Removing Connector Panel

1. Remove the cooling fan (5V) cable from the clamp.
2. Remove the cooling fan (5V) connector.
3. Remove the connector panel screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup: 2).
表 4-24
No. Part name

1 Connector panel
3
2 Connector panel screw
(tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup)
3 Cooling fan (5V)
1
4. Remove the connector panel.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-24

(2) Replacing Cooling Fan (5V)

1. Remove the cooling fan (5V) cable from the clamp.
2. Remove the cooling fan (5V) connector.
3. Remove the fan bracket screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup: 2).
表 4-25
No. Part name

3 1 Connector panel
2 Fan bracket screw
2 3 Cooling fan (5V)
4. Remove the cooling fan screw (round head spring screw M3 × 20: 2) from the fan bracket.
5. Replace the cooling fan.
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket
NOTE
Before replacing the board assemblies, remove the following parts.
• Media guide R2: "4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-17
• Connector panel: "4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan" p.4-23
1. Remove the following connectors from the main board assembly.
4-25 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

CAUTION
• When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the main board assembly
connector, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
Pulling or pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-26

Table 4-26 Connectors to Main Board Assembly

No. Connector # of pins Color Connect to Remarks
No.
1 J1 14 White Power board assembly Connected to CN301 by using
DC cable assembly.
2 J5 FFC Black Operation panel unit assembly
3 J9 FFC Black CR board assembly J203 Connected to J203 by using CR
tape wire.
4 J10 FFC Black CR board assembly Connected to J202 by using CR
tape wire.
5 J11 FFC Black CR board assembly Connected to J201 by using CR
tape wire.
6 J12 4 White PF ENC assembly -
7 J14 - - Unused -
8 J15 - - Unused -
9 J16 - - Unused -
10 J17 - - Unused -
11 J20 2 White PF motor assembly -
12 J21 3 White CR motor assembly -
13 J22 4 White Pump motor assembly -
14 J23 - - Unused -
15 J24 3 White CR_ORG sensor -
16 J25 2 White Suction fan 1 assembly -
17 J26 2 Black Suction fan 2 assembly -
18 J27 3 Black Wiper origin sensor -
19 J28 2 Red Suction fan 3 assembly -
20 J29 2 Yellow Suction fan 4 assembly -
21 J30 3 Blue Lever sensor assembly -
22 J28 2 White Cooling fan (5V) assembly -
23 J29 3 Red Waste fluid level switch (VJ16) -
24 J36 2 Red Cooling fan (24V) assembly -
25 J38 3 Yellow Cover R sensor -
26 J40 4 Blue Cover L sensor -
27 J41 - - Unused -
28 J42 4 Black P_REAR sensor -
29 J43 8 - HEATER CONT board -
30 J45 - - Unused -
4-27 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 4-26 Connectors to Main Board Assembly (Continued)

No. Connector # of pins Color Connect to Remarks
No.
31 J46 4 Natural HEATER CONT board -
color
J14 J16 J12 J32 PANEL TO CR J201

M_INK C FAN1 J5 J11
K_INK PF ENC
J15 J17 J40 J34 TO CR J202
C_INK Y_INK COVER_L C FAN2 J10
J42 J36 TO CR J203

J24 J33 J18
P_REAR_ C FAN3(+24V) J9
CR_ORG W SENSE R REV_INK1 SENS
J27 J35 J19
WIPE_ORG W SENSE L REV_INK2
J30 J37 J41
LEVER SENS REV SENS1 DEBUG
J38 J39
J44
COVER_R REV SENS2
isp JTAG
J4
J2 isp-CLK- JTAG
OPTION IF
MOTOR
SYSTEM
J7
PF
J8
J20
FPGA JTAG
MAIN board assembly
MOTOR
J21
CR
J43
SODIMM 128MB
PUMP1
PUMP2
J22
J23
SERIAL REV
J3
BLOWER
BLOWER
FAN2
FAN1
J26
J25
POWER SUPPLY
ETHER
BLOWER
BLOWER
FAN4
FAN3
NET
To CONT_PS
J29
J28
J1
USB IF
J46
J6
J13
2. Remove the cable from the three clamps on the main board bracket.
3. Remove the following parts (if needed);
a. AC cable between terminal block and Main board assembly
b. DC cable between Main board assembly and CNT
c. Serial cable assembly between Main board assembly and CNT
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-28

4. Remove the board bracket-retaining screws (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 5).
1
2
表 4-27
No. Part name

1 Main board bracket
2 Main board bracket-retaining screw
5. Slide the main board bracket to the right then lift from the front side and remove it.
4-29 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly
NOTE
• When replacing the main board assembly, make sure to back up the parameters by following the
instructions in "7.3.1 Parameter Backup" p.7-12. Otherwise, the life counters on the waste fluid
box or the tube cannot be updated and ink may overflow inside the machine.
Perform other adjustments by following the instructions in "7.2 Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
• Before replacing the main board assembly, remove the following parts.
• Board bracket: "4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-24
1. Remove the screws retaining the main board assembly to the board bracket (cup screw M3 × 6: 7)
.
表 4-28
2
No. Part name
1 Main board assembly
2 Main board assembly screw
(cup screw M3 × 6)
2. Replace the main board assembly

4. Install the parameters and firmware by following the instructions in "7.3 Working with MUTOH
Maintenance Engineer Assistant" p.7-8 and "7.4 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance" p.7-
30.
5. Perform adjustment on media edge sensor and the P_REAR sensor by following the instructions in "7.2
Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-30

4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly

1. Remove the cable from the five brackets at the top of the HEATER CONT board assembly.
表 4-29
No. Part name

1 Board bracket
2 Clamp
2. Remove the following connectors from the HEATER CONT board assembly.
Table 4-30 Connectors to HEATER CONT board assembly
No. Connector # of Color Connect to Remarks

No. pins
1 J2 - - - Unused
2 J3 - - - Unused
3 J4 - - - Unused
4 J5 - - - Unused
5 J6 FFC - HEATER RELAY board
6 J7 - - - Not equipped
7 J8 4 White HEATER JUNCTION board Connected to J2 by using power

cable assembly between CNT -
JC.
8 J9 Serial - HEATER JUNCTION board Connected to J3 by using serial

cable assembly between MAIN
- CNT.
9 J10 Serial - Main board assembly Connected to assembly J43 by

using serial cable between
MAIN - CNT.
10 J11 - - - Unused
4-31 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 4-30 Connectors to HEATER CONT board assembly (Continued)

No. pins
11 J12 - - - Unused
12 J13 - - - Unused
13 J14 - - - Unused
14 J15 - - - Unused
15 J16 - - - Unused
16 J17 - - - Unused
17 J18 - - - Unused
18 J19 8 White Main board assembly Connected to J46 by using

power cable assembly between
MAIN - CNT.
19 J20 - - - Unused
20 J21 - - - Unused
21 J22 2 White Terminal block AC cable between terminal

block and CNT
22 J23 2 White HEATER RELAY AC cable assembly between

CNT - RLY
3. Replace the following parts;

AC cable assembly between CNT - RLY
Tape wire between CNT - RLY
DC cable assembly between MAIN - CNT
Serial cable between MAIN - CNT
AC cable between CNT - Power unit
DC cable between CNT - Power unit
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-32

4. Remove the HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 4), and
remove it.
2 1 2
表 4-31
No. Part name

1 HEATER CONT board bracket
2 HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw
5. Remove the HEATER CONT board-retaining screw (cup screw M3 × 6 white: 9).
表 4-32
2
No. Part name
1 HEATER CONT board
assembly
1
2 HEATER CONT board
assembly screw
(cup screw M3 × 6 white)
6. Replace the HEATER CONT board assembly.

8. Install the firmware for the HEATER CONT board following the instruction in "7.3.7 Sub Controller
Installation" p.7-29.
4-33 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly

1. Remove the cable from the five clamps on the top of HEATER CONT board bracket.
表 4-33
No. Part name

2 Clamp
2. Remove the following connectors from the HEATER RELAY board assembly.
Table 4-34 Connectors to HEATER RELAY board assembly

No. pins
1 J1 2 White HEATER CONT board Connected to J23 by using AC

cable assembly between CNT -
RLY.
2 J2 7 White Platen heater 1
3 J3 FFC - HEATER CONT board Connected to J6 by using tape

assembly wire between CNT - RLY.
4 J4 2 White AC-IN
5 J5 7 White Platen heater
6 J6 2 White AC-OUT
7 J7 3 White Pre-heater 1
8 J8 3 White Pre-heater 2
9 J9 4 White After-heater
10 J10 2 Blue Cooling fan
11 J12 2 White Platen thermistor 1
12 J13 2 Black Platen thermistor 2
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-34

Table 4-34 Connectors to HEATER RELAY board assembly

No. pins
13 J15 2 Red Pre-thermistor
14 J17 3 White After-thermistor
3. Replace the AC cable assembly between CNT-RLY, and RLY_AC cable assembly.
4. Remove the HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screws (tapping screw M3 × 6 tight cup: 4), and
remove the board bracket.
2 1 2
表 4-35
No. Part name

2 HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw
(tapping screw M3 × 6 tight cup: 4)
4-35 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5. Remove the relay board assembly retaining screws (cup screw M3 × 6 white: 9).
表 4-36
2
No. Part name
1 Relay board assembly
2 Relay board assembly screw
6. Replace the relay board assembly.

4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly
CAUTION
• When removing the power board assembly, remove the power cable and wait for at least
5 minutes before taking it out; this will discharge the residual electrical charge of the
electrolytic capacitor.
If you handle these boards before the capacitor charge is fully discharged, you may suffer
electric shock.
• To avoid electric shock, never touch the back of the power board.When handling the
power board, take the side of the board.
• To avoid a short circuit, do not place the power board assembly directly on conductive
objects.
NOTE
Before replacing the power board assembly, remove the following parts.
• Rear cover: "4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-17
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-36

1. Remove the following connector from the power board assembly.

Table 4-37 Connectors to Power Board Assembly
No. Connector No. # of pins Color Connect to Remarks
1 CN301 - White Main board assembly Connected to J1 by using DC cable
assembly.
2. Remove the following connector from the HEATER-CONT board.

Table 4-38 Connectors to HEATER-CONT Board Assembly
No. Connector No. # of pins Color Connect to Remarks
1 J22 - White Terminal Connected to terminal block by
using Terminal block to CNT AC
cable assembly
3. Remove the fuse-side two screws (pan head small screw M4 × 6) retaining Fuse to terminal block AC
cable assembly, and remove the assembly.
表 4-39
No. Part name

1 Fuse to terminal block AC cable
assembly
2 Screws retaining Fuse to
terminal block AC cable
assembly to fuse holder
(pan head small screw M4 × 6)
1 2
4-37 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4. Remove the three cables from clamp of the front side of HEATER-RELAY board bracket.
表 4-40
No. Part name

1 HEATER-RELAY board
bracket
1
2 Clamp
5. Remove the power board bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6 S tight cup).
2 2
表 4-41
No. Part name

1 Power board bracket
2 Screw retaining power board bracket
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-38

6. Remove the power board assembly-retaining screw (cup screw M3 × 6 white: 9).
表 4-42
2 No. Part name

1 Power board assembly
2 2 Power board screw

7. Replace the power board assembly.

4.3.7 Replacing Fuse
CAUTION
Use the Fuse which specification matches as follows.

• Specification: 250V 15A, φ10.31mm × 38.1mm
• Double pole/ Neutral Fusing
NOTE
Before replacing fuse, remove the following parts.
4-39 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

1. Pick up the fuse using a finger on the center of the part and remove it.
表 4-43
No. Part name

1 Fuse
1
2. Replace the fuse.

3. Remove the two screws (pan head small screw M4 × 6) retaining the noise filter to fuse AC cable
assembly and fuse to terminal block AC cable assembly.
表 4-44
1 2
No. Part name
1 Screws retaining the fuse to
terminal block AC cable
assembly
2 Fuse to terminal block AC cable
assembly
2 1
4. Remove the AC inlet.

"4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly" p.4-41
5. Remove the noise filter to fuse AC cable assembly from AC inlet.
6. Replace the assembly.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-40

7. Remove the protect cover on the top of terminal block, then remove the screws retaining the fuse to
terminal block AC cable assembly to terminal block.
表 4-45
No. Part name

1 Protect cover of terminal block
2 Screws retaining the fuse to
2 terminal block AC cable
assembly
8. Replace the fuse to terminal block AC cable assembly.

4-41 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the inlet assembly, remove the following parts.
(1) Removing Cooling Fan (24V)

1. Remove the screw retaining the cooling fan (24V) (pan head small screw M 4 × 30: 2).
表 4-46
No. Part name
1 1 Cooling fan (24V) screw

(pan head small screw M 4 ×
30)
2 Cooling fan (24V)
2. Remove the cooling fan (24V) cable connector.
表 4-47
No. Part name

1 Cooling fan (24V) connector
3. Replace the cooling fan.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-42

TIP
• When reassembling the cooling fan, spread the fan seal (shown in the diagram below) under the
fan, then screw the fan on it
表 4-48
No. Part name

1 Fan seal
• Installation direction of the cooling fan assembly (sealing surface and cable pulling direction) is
specified. Install it with the sealing surface facing up.
4-43 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Replacing Inlet Assembly

1. Remove the inlet assembly-retaining screws (round head spring screw (finishing) M3 × 10: 2).
.
表 4-49
1
No. Part name
1 Inlet assembly connector
2 Inlet assembly
3 Inlet assembly screw
(round head spring screw
2 (finishing) M3 × 10)
2. Remove the connectors from the inlet assembly.

3. Remove the Inlet fixing board.
.
表 4-50
1
No. Part name
1 Inlet assembly
2 Inlet fixing board
4. Replace the inlet assembly

TIP
When installing the inlet assembly, match the corresponding color connectors.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-44

4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components

4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF motor assembly, remove the following covers.
• L side cover: "4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover" p.4-10
1. Remove the PF motor assembly connectors out through the PF motor cable assembly.
表 4-51
1
No. Part name
1 PF motor cable
2 PF motor assembly connector
2. Remove the screw retaining the PF motor to the PF bracket (M4 × 8 round head spring screw: 2).
表 4-52
No. Part name

1 PF bracket:
2 2 PF motor screw
(round head spring screw M4 ×
8)
1 3 PF speed reduction belt
4-45 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. Remove the screw (round head spring screw M3 × 6: 1) retaining PF encoder fixing board t2 to PF
bracket, then remove the PF encoder fixing board t2.
.
表 4-53
No. Part name

1 PF bracket
2 Screws retaining PF encoder
1 fixing board t2 (round head
spring screw m3 × 6)
3 PF encoder fixing board t2
2 3
NOTE
When removing PF encoder fixing board t2 from the PF bracket, do not damage the PF scale by
contacting with PF ENC assembly. Also, do not bend or touch the outer circumference of PF scale.
4. Remove the four screws (tapping screw M3 × 6 S tight cup) retaining PF bracket and remove the bracket
with PF motor assembly.
.
表 4-54
No. Part name

1 PF bracket
2 2 Screws retaining PF bracket
(tapping screw M3 × 6 S tight
cup)
5. Remove the screw retaining the PF motor assembly and replace the assembly.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-46

NOTE
Move the PF speed reduction pulley with your hand to check if the PF speed reduction belt is equally
balanced on the pulley center section of the PF motor assembly.
7. Perform adjustments by following the instructions in "7.2 Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
4-47 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF_ENC assembly, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the PF_ENC assembly connectors from the main board assembly.
"4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly" p.4-29
2. Take the PF_ENC assembly cable off the clamp, then pull it out through the L frame cable inlet.
3. Remove the PF_ENC assembly-retaining screw (tapping screw M2 × 5: 2).
表 4-55
No. Part name

1 PF_ENC assembly screw
(tapping screw M2 × 5)
2
2 PF_ENC assembly
NOTE
Do not damage, bend the PF scale, or touch the outer edge of the scale.
4. Replace the PF_ENC assembly.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-48

4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF_ENC scale assembly, remove the following parts.
1. Remove the ENC holder-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, P tight cup).
表 4-56
No. Part name

1 ENC holder screw
1 cup)
1
2 PF_ENC scale
2 3 ENC holder
2. Replace the PF scale.

NOTE
When handling the PF scale, note the following.
• Do not damage or bend the PF scale. Do not touch the peripheral surface of the PF scale.
• Make sure that no double-sided tape remains on the slit mounting flange.
4-49 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly
(1) Replacing After-heater

1. Remove the media guide F.
"4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F" p.4-16
2. Remove the connectors from both AFT_H relay assembly and AFT_T relay assembly.
3. Remove the after-heater and thermistor.
表 4-57
No. Part name

1 After-heater
2 Thermistor assembly
NOTE
Wipe the grease away from the heater attachment area before installing it.
(2) Replacing Pre-heater

1. Remove the media guide R2.
"4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-17
2. Remove the connectors for PRE_H relay assembly and PRE_H2 relay assembly.
NOTE
Replace the pre-heater while media guide R1 is attached to the printer.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-50

3. Remove the media guide stay b-retaining screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3 bk: 5), and remove the media
guide stay b.
表 4-58
No. Part name

1 Media guide stay b
2 Media guide stay b-retaining
screw (cup screw M3 × 6 Ni-3
bk)
4. Remove the pre-heater and thermistor assembly.
表 4-59
No. Part name

1 Media guide R1
2 Pre-heater
3 Thermistor assembly

NOTE
Wipe the grease away from the heater attachment area before installing it.
4-51 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components

4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the CR motor assembly, remove the following covers.
1. Detach the CR motor assembly connector from the cable connector.

2. Take the CR motor assembly cable off the clamp.
3. Release the CR locker by pushing it with your finger, then move the carriage from the capping position
to the left.
4. Loosen the CR tension mounting shaft on the R side frame, then release the CR belt tension.
表 4-60
No. Part name

1 CR belt
2 CR tension mounting shaft
5. Take the CR belt off the CR motor assembly pulley on the L side frame.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-52

6. Remove the screws retaining the CR motor assembly to the CR motor mounting material (cup screw M4
× 8: 4).
表 4-61
No. Part name

2
1 CR motor mounting
material
2 CR motor screw
1 (cup screw M4 × 8)
3 CR motor
2
3
7. Replace the CR motor assembly.

4.5.2 Replacing CR Origin Point Sensor
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the CR_HP sensor assembly, remove the R side cover.
to the left.
4-53 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2. Pull out the CR_HP cable assembly connector from the CR_HP sensor.
表 4-62
No. Part name

1 Hook
3
2 CR_HP sensor
3 Connector
1 2
3. Release the hook retaining the CR_HP sensor, then remove the CR_HP sensor.
4. Replace the CR_HP sensor.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-54

4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor
NOTE
Before replacing the lever sensor, remove the following covers.
1. Move down the pressure lever forward (downward).

2. Detach the lever sensor cable assembly connector from the lever sensor.
3. Release the hook retaining the lever sensor, then replace the lever sensor.
4-55 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.5.4 Replacing T Fence
NOTE
Before replacing the T fence, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the T fence spring from T fence spring hook on the L frame side.
表 4-63
1 No. Part name

1 T fence spring
2 T fence spring hook
2. From the three fence guides, remove the T fences by following instructions in the diagram below.
T fence
1 Ԙ
Ԛ
ԙ
Slide the T fence in the order side view

of arrows shown above to detach.
2
Fence guide
No. Part name

1 T fence
2 Fence guide
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-56

CAUTION
When removing the T fence, note the following.

• Do not pull the T fence by force; the fence guide can be easily broken.
• Pay attention not to damage or break the T fence.
3. Remove the T fence from the CR rail frame R hook on the R frame side, then pull it out toward the
direction of the arrow in the diagram.
表 4-64
No. Part name

1 T fence
2 T fence hook
1
4. Replace the T fence.

5. Fold a new T fence to the outside (90 degrees) at the point 9 mm from the edge, then install it to the CR
rail frame hook.
NOTE
Attach the C-cut side of T fence to the origin side of the CR rail frame.
Attach C-cut side

to the origin side.
T fence
4-57 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

6. Insert the T fence into the CR encoder assembly.
表 4-65
2 No. Part name

1 T fence
2 CR encoder assembly
7. Install the T fence to the fence guide.
表 4-66
side view No. Part name

1 T fence

Ԛ
2 Fence guide
Ԙ
ԙ
Slide the T fence in the order

of arrows shown above to install.
8. Install the T fence spring to the T fence spring hook on the L frame side.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-58

4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley and CR belt
NOTE
Before replacing CR driven pulley assembly and CR belt, remove the following covers.
• Top cover: "4.2.6 Removing Top Cover" p.4-15
to the left.
2. Loosen the CR tension mounting shaft on the R side frame, then release the CR belt tension.
表 4-67
5
back-side㧕 4
No. Part name
1 Driven pulley shaft
2 CR belt
3 CR driven pulley
4 Tension spring
1
5 CR tension mounting
shaft
3. Take the CR belt off the CR motor assembly pulley on the L frame side.
4. Replace the CR belt.
5. Remove the CR driven pulley.
6. Remove the CR driven pulley shaft from the CR driven pulley.
4-59 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

NOTE
• Installation direction of the driven pulley shaft is specified.Thin shaft side faces down.
Also refer to " " p.10-4.
• After installing the CR driven pulley, move the carriage with your hand from side to side, and
check if the CR belt is equally balanced on the pulley center section of the CR motor assembly.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-60

4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly

This section describes how to replace the pressure spring, pressure roller assembly, and pressure arm
assembly.
(1) Replacing Pressure Spring

1. Remove the spring attached to pressure bracket and pressure arm using spring hook, tweezers, or
longnose pliers.
2. Replace the pressure spring.
(2) Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly

1. Remove the media guide R2.
"4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-17
2. Remove the media guide stay a screw (cup screw M3 × 6, Ni-3bk: 5), and tilt it to the far side.
表 4-68
No. Part name

1 Pressure arm assembly
2 Media guide stay a
(at slant angle)
3 Media guide a-retaining
1 screw (cup screw M3 × 6,
Ni-3bk)
2 3
3. Remove the pressure spring.

"(1) Replacing Pressure Spring" p.4-60
4. Remove the pressure arm assembly and replace it through the front space of tilted media guide stay a.
4-61 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components

4.6.1 Replacing Print Head
NOTE
• Before replacing the print head, remove the R side cover or the top cover.
"4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover" p.4-6
"4.2.6 Removing Top Cover" p.4-15
1. Perform ink discharge operation to discharge ink entirely from the ink paths.
NOTE
Cover the platen surface by placing media before performing ink discharging so that the ink does not
spill on the platen directly.
TIP
"5.7.9 HeadWash Menu" p.5-44
2. Initialize the shot count of the print head.

to the left.
4. Remove the CR board cover-retaining screw (M3 × 8, S tight cup: 1).
表 4-69
No. Part name

2
1 CR board cover screw
(M3 × 8, S tight cup)
2 CR board cover
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-62

5. Remove the CR board cover.

6. Remove the cable cover L-retaining screw ( round head spring screw M3 × 8 W sems: 2) (tapping screw
M3 × 8, S tight cup: 1).
表 4-70
No. Part name

1 Cable cover L screw
(M3 × 8 round head
spring screw W sems)
1
2 Cable cover L
2 3 Cable cover L screw

(M3 × 8, S tight cup)
7. Remove the cable cover R-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 8, S tight cup: 2) (round head spring
screw M3 × 8 W sems: 1).
表 4-71
3
No. Part name
1 Cable cover R
2 Cable cover R screw
(M3 × 8 round head
spring screw W sems: 1)
3 Cable cover R screw
(M3 × 8, S tight cup: 2)
2
8. Remove the cable cover.
4-63 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

9. While rotating the damper fixing material, remove the eight ink tubes from the damper fixing material
hook.
表 4-72
1 No. Part name

1 Ink tube
2 Damper fixing material
10. Remove the damper fixing material.

11. Remove the eight damper assemblies connected to the print head that needs to be replaced, with a flat-
head driver.
CAUTION
• Do not press the transparent film on the damper assembly with your hand. Doing so may
discharge the ink filled inside the damper assembly.
• Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the damper assembly.
NOTE
When removing the damper assembly, note the following.
• To easily remove the damper assembly, insert a flat-head driver between the carriage and the
damper assembly left protruding part, then pry out the damper assembly.
• To avoid residual ink leakage, place the removed damper on a rag.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-64

表 4-73
No. Part name
1 1 Flat-head driver insertion point

2 Damper assembly
12. Remove the damper locating material-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 × 6 W sems: 2).
表 4-74
1 No. Part name

1 Damper locating material
2 Damper locating material screw
6 W sems)
13. Remove the damper locating material.
4-65 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

14. Remove the print head from the carriage.
表 4-75
No. Part name

1 Print head
2 Head tape wire
1 2
15. Remove the two head tape wire from the print head.
CAUTION
• The QR code label on the print head should be written down for later use or kept in a safe
place.
• Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get any dust.
• When connecting or removing the tape wire (FFC), always pull or push the wire
perpendicularly to the connector.Pulling or pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/
break the terminals in the connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the print head.
You can connect/remove the tape wire up to five times.
• The folding orientation of the FFC (tape wire) differs between head side and the CR board
side.Make sure to attach the tape wire in the appropriate orientation.
16. Replace the print head.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-66

4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly
(1) Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the cutter holder assembly, remove the following parts referring to the
instructions shown below.
Removing the cable cover L, R: refer to "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61
Removing the P_EDGE sensor, cutter sensor connector: refer to "4.10.1 Replacing CR Board
Assembly" p.4-91
1. Release the sensor cables in the front of the cutter holder assembly from the clamps (3 points) on the front
of the cutter holder assembly.
表 4-76
No. Part name

1 Clamp
2 Cutter holder assembly screw
8 W sems)
3 Cutter holder assembly
4 Height adjusting lever screw
5 Height adjusting lever
2. Remove the height adjusting lever spring from the height adjusting lever.
3. Remove the cutter holder-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 × 8 W sems: 2).
4. Remove the cutter holder assembly from the carriage.
5. Replace the parts.
4-67 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assembly

1. Remove the cutter holder assembly.
2. Push the tab of the CR lock kicker with a sharp-pointed tool or a flat-head driver to remove the CR lock
kicker.
表 4-77

No. Part name
1 Cutter solenoid assembly iron-
core
2 Cutter solenoid spring
3 Cutter solenoid assembly
4 CR lock kicker
5 CR lock kicker tab
3. Remove the cutter solenoid assembly iron-core and the cutter solenoid spring.
4. While opening the cutter holder assembly upper tab, push out the cutter solenoid assembly from the cutter
holder assembly bottom with a flat-head driver, then remove it.
5. Remove the cutter solenoid terminal connector.
6. Replace the cutter solenoid assembly.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-68

NOTE
When installing the cutter solenoid, note the following.
• Joint the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker, push down the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker
together to install them onto the cutter holder.
表 4-78

No. Part name
1 CR lock kicker
2 Cutter cap
• Make sure to join the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker.Otherwise, when turning the power ON,
the carriage cannot move from the origin point to the left.
4-69 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(3) Replacing CR_ENC Assembly

2. Remove the CR_ENC assembly-retaining screw (round head spring screw M 3 × 8 W sems: 1).
表 4-79
No. Part name

1 Mounting plate screw
3
2 CR_ENC assembly
3 CR_ENC assembly screw
2 (round head spring screw M 3
× 8 W sems)
3. Detach the cable from the three clamps.

4. Remove the CR_ENC assembly.
(4) Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-70

2. Remove the P_EDGE sensor assembly-retaining screw (M3 × 6, P tight cup: 1).
表 4-80
No. Part name

1 P_EDGE sensor assembly
screw
(M3 × 6, P tight cup)
2 P_EDGE sensor assembly
3. Detach the cable from the three clamps.

4. Remove the P_EDGE sensor assembly.
4-71 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components

4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly
NOTE
• When replacing the parts inside the maintenance assembly, make sure to clear the following
counter parameters.
• “Waste Ink” or “Cleaning”: "6.3.1 Counter Display Menu" p.6-4
• Before replacing the parts in the pump cap assembly, remove the following parts.
• Ink holder cover: "4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover" p.4-12
• Scroller receiver: "4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-18
1. Enter “CR maintenance confirmation” mode using operation panel, then turn the printer power off.
Confirm that the cleaner head is positioned in the front side.
"Operation Manual"
表 4-81
No. Part name

Pull near side
1 Pump cap assembly
2 Cleaner head
1
2
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-72

2. Pull up the pressure lever.
表 4-82
No. Part name

1 Pressure lever
3. Remove the lock bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup tight: 1).
表 4-83
No. Part name

1 Head lock-retaining screw
(tapping screw M3 × 6, S cup
tight)
1
2 Head lock
4. Remove the cable on the maintenance base 1 from the clamps.
4-73 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

表 4-84
No. Part name

1 Motor relay connector
2 Clamp
2 1
5. Remove the motor relay connector.

6. Remove the wiper phase sensor connector.
表 4-85
No. Part name

1 Wiper phase sensor connector
2 Pump unit
7. Remove the maintenance base 1 front part-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 2).
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-74

表 4-86
No. Part name

1 Maintenance base 1-retaining
screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S
tight cup)
2 Maintenance base 2
1 2
8. Remove the maintenance base 1 rear part-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 2).
表 4-87
No. Part name

1 Maintenance base 1-retaining
screw (tapping screw M3 × 6, S
tight cup)
2 1
4-75 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

9. Hold the maintenance base 1 up and rotate it to remove as shown below.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-76

4.7.2 Replacing Maintenance Assembly

This section describes how to replace the maintenance assembly.
Maintenance assembly consists of pump cap assembly, frame cap, cap slider, cap head, and cap spring.
NOTE
Before removing the pump cap assembly, remove the following parts.
• Maintenance base assembly: "4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly" p.4-71
• Ink holder cover: "4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover" p.4-12
1. Remove the screw retaining the maintenance assembly to the maintenance base 1 (round head spring
screw M3 × 6: 4).
表 4-88
1 No. Part name

1 Maintenance assembly screw
(Back)
3 Maintenance assembly
2. Remove the maintenance assembly from the maintenance base 1.

3. Attach a new maintenance assembly to the maintenance base 1.
4. Insert the tube into the drain guide 2.
4-77 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

表 4-89
No. Part name

1
1 Tube
2 Drain guide 2

5. Attach the maintenance base 1 to where it is.

4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper)
NOTE
Before replacing the cleaner head, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the cleaner head from the cleaner head by using tweezers, and lift it from the holder upward.
表 4-90
2 No. Part name

1 Pump cap assembly
2 Cleaning wiper
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-78

NOTE
To remove the wiper, use the tweezers to unhook the lower hook of the wiper.
Hook
2. Replace the cleaner head.

NOTE
When removing the cleaner head, note the following.
• Do not touch the cleaner head with your bare hands.
• Make sure that the cleaner head get no dust or oil.
• Install the cleaner head so that the point of the cleaner head is located to the observer's right side.
表 4-91
2 No. Part name

1 Cleaner head
1
2 Head point
• Insert the cleaner head into the holder to the full depth securely and hook it.
4-79 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components

Four Ink Holder (I/H) assemblies are installed in this product. The replacement procedures for one of these
I/H assemblies are explained in this section.
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the I/H assembly, remove the following covers.
• I/H cover: "4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover" p.4-12
4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly

TIP
2. Remove the ink sensor assembly connector (4 pieces) from the main board assembly.
TIP
"4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-24
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-80

3. Take the removed sensor assembly cable off the clamp (2 points).
表 4-92
No. Part name

1 Clamp
2 I/H assembly
4. Remove the joint screw (M6) connecting the I/H assembly and the SUS pipe, and remove the o-ring
inside.
表 4-93
No. Part name

1 Joint screw
2 I/H assembly
2
5. Remove the screw retaining the I/H assembly to the I/H base (tapping screw M3 × 10, S cup: 2).
6. Replace the I/H assembly.
4-81 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

NOTE
When attaching the part, make sure the followings:
• When tighten the joint screw, use the optional jig and pay attention to the fastening torque.
"10.3 Jigs and Tools" p.10-3
• Used O-ring become deformed. Do not use the O-ring removed and attach the new one.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-82

4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the ink ID sensor assembly, remove the following parts.
• I/H assembly: "4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly" p.4-79
1. Detach the ink ID sensor assembly cable from the hooks (2 pieces) on the back of the I/H assembly.
2. Remove the screw retaining the holder pressure spring to the IC holder mounting plate (P tight cup M3 ×
6 Ni-3: 2).
表 4-94
No. Part name

1 1 Holder pressure spring
2 IC holder mounting plate
3
3 Holder pressure spring screw
(P tight cup M3 × 6 Ni-3)
3. Remove the screw retaining the ink END sensor to the holder mounting plate (tapping screw M3 × 10, S
cup: 1).
表 4-95
No. Part name

1 Ink END sensor screw
2 Ink END sensor
1 2
4-83 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4. Release the tab of the frame assembly needle, push down and slide it sideways (see the directions of the
arrows), then remove the cartridge frame assembly.
表 4-96
No. Part name

1 Frame assembly needle
2 Frame assembly needle tab
Ԙ
5. Remove the screw retaining the ink NOT sensor to the I/H assembly (M2 × 8, S tight binding: 1).
表 4-97
No. Part name

1 Ink NOT sensor
2 Ink NOT sensor screw
(M2 × 8, S tight binding)
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-84

6. Replace the ink cable assembly.

NOTE
When reassembling the unit, note the following sensor fastening torque.
• Ink NOT sensor: Slight overtorque may damage the parts. Gradually torque the sensor to avoid
tightening it too much.
• Confirm that the switch is not stuck when it is pressed.
• Ink END sensor: Tighten the sensor to avoid rattling.
4-85 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the cover sensor assembly, remove the parts as follows.
"4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover" p.4-10
1. Remove the screw retaining the sensor cover (L/R) to the frame (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 1 per
cover). (The diagram below shows the sensor cover R).
表 4-98
No. Part name

1 Sensor cover R
2 Sensor cover R screw
1 (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight
2 cup)
2. Remove the cover sensor connector from the main board.

"4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-24
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-86

3. Detach the cable from the cover (L/R) sensor cable-retaining clamp.(The diagram below shows the cover
R sensor).
表 4-99
2
No. Part name
1 Clamp
2 Cover R sensor cable
4. Replace the cover sensor assembly.

4-87 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board
NOTE
Before replacing the heater junction board, remove the parts as follows.
1. Remove the following connectors shown in the table below from the heater junction board.
Table 4-100 Connectors to Heater junction board

No. pins
1 J2 4 White HEATER CONT board Connected to J8 by using power

cable between CNT - JC.
2 J3 - - HEATER CONT board Connected to J9 by using serial

cable between MAIN - CNT.
3 J5 10 White INK K Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
4 J6 10 White INK C Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
5 J7 10 White INK M Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
6 J8 10 White INK Y Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
7 J9 - - - Unused
8 J10 - - Unused
9 J11 - - - Unused
10 J12 - - - Unused
11 J13 - - - Unused
12 J14 - - - Unused
13 J15 - - - Unused
14 J16 - - - Unused
15 J17 - - - Unused
16 J18 - - - Unused
17 J19 - - - Unused
18 J20 - - - Unused
19 J21 - - - Unused
20 J22 - - - Unused
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-88

Table 4-100 Connectors to Heater junction board

No. pins
21 J23 - - - Unused
22 J24 - - - Unused
2. Replace the power cable between CNT - JC and serial cable between MAIN - CNT.
3. Remove the screw retaining the heater junction board (cup screw M3 × 6, white: 4).
表 4-101
1
No. Part name
1 Heater junction board
assembly
2 Heater junction assembly
2 2 screw
(cup screw M3 × 6, white)
4. Replace the heater junction board.

5. To remove the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
4-89 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components

4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly
1. Remove the screw retaining the fan plate to the B frame (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 3), then
remove the suction fan assembly.
表 4-102
No. Part name

1 Fan plate screw (M3 × 6, S tight
cup)
2 Fan plate
2
2. Remove the suction fan assembly cable connector, then remove the suction fan assembly from the B
frame.
表 4-103
No. Part name

1 Suction fan cable connector
2 Suction fan screw (M4 × 8 pan
head small screw)
3 Suction fan
4 Suction fan screw (M4 × 40
round head spring screw
finishing)
3 4 5 5 Fan duct
6 Fan duct screw (M4 × 5 pan
head small screw)
3. Remove the screw retaining the fan duct (pan head small screw M4 × 5: 2), then remove the fan duct.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-90

4. Remove the suction fan assembly retaining-screw (round head spring screw M4 × 40 finishing: 1) (pan
head small screw M4 × 8: 1).
5. Replace the suction fan assembly
4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the P_REAR sensor assembly, remove the following covers.
1. Remove the PF_REAR sensor assembly connector from the main board assembly.
2. Take the P_REAR sensor assembly cable off the clamp.
3. Remove the screw retaining the PE sensor plate to the frame (tapping screw M3 × 6, S tight cup: 1).
表 4-104
No. Part name

1 P_REAR sensor assembly
1
2 PE sensor plate screw
2 cup)
3 PE sensor plate
4. Remove the screw retaining the P_REAR sensor assembly to the PE sensor plate (cup screw M2 × 6: 2).
4-91 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

表 4-105
1
No. Part name
screw (cup screw M2 × 6)
3 PE sensor plate
5. Replace the P_REAR sensor assembly.

4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components

4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing CR board assembly, remove the following covers.
• CR board cover: refer to the instructions up to step 4 in "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61.
1. Remove the following connectors from the CR board assembly.
CAUTION
• When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the CR board assembly connector,
always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-92

Table 4-106 Connectors to CR Board Assembly

No. pins
1 J204 31 pins Black Print head Connected to J1.
2 J205 31 pins Black Print head Connected to J2.
3 J201 31 pins Black Main board assembly Connected to J11.
6 J207 4 pins White CR_ENC assembly
7 J206 2 pins White Cutter solenoid assembly
8 J208 4 pins Black P_EDGE sensor assembly
9 J209 PG origin point sensor

3 pins White
assembly
2. Remove the CR board assembly-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 × 8, S tight cup: 4).
表 4-107
No. Part name

1 CR board screw
cup)
1 1
2 CR board
3 CR board mounting plate
3. Replace the CR board assembly.

4-93 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube
NOTE
Before replacing the ink tube, remove the following covers.
(1) Preparation of Replacing Ink Tube

2. Remove the tube clamps (3 points).
表 4-108
No. Part name

1 Tube guide
2 Tube clamp
3. Remove the tube film guide retainers (3 points).
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-94

表 4-109
No. Part name

1 Tube guide
2 Tube film guide retainer
1
2
4. Remove the CR board cover.

Up to step 4 in "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61
5. Remove the CR tape wire from the CR board.
6. Remove the screw retaining the bearer mounting material and the bearer fixing material (tapping screw
M 3 × 8, S tight cup: 2) (M3 × 8, P tight cup: 1).
表 4-110
No. Part name
1 1 Bearer mounting material

2 2 Bearer mounting material
screw (M3 × 8, S tight)
3 Screw retaining the bearer
fixing material (M3 × 8, P
tight)
4 Bearer fixing material
3
4
7. Remove the bearer mounting material and the bearer fixing material.
(2) Replacing Ink Tube

1. Loosen the joint screw (M6) connecting the ink tube and the F branch.
4-95 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

表 4-111
No. Part name
1
1 Joint screw (M6)
2 F branch
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-96

2. Loosen the joint screw (M6) connecting the ink tube and the cartridge pipe.
表 4-112
No. Part name

1 1 Joint screw (M6)
2 Cartridge pipe
3. Remove the ink tube.

4. Remove the following parts from the ink tube.
• Joint screw (M6: 2 pieces)
• O-ring, large: (M6: 2 pieces)
5. Replace the ink tube.
NOTE
Used O-ring become deformed. Do not use the O-ring removed and attach the new one.
4-97 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire
CAUTION
• When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the CR board assembly connector,
always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
NOTE
Before replacing the CR tape wire, remove the following covers.
• CR board cover and the cable clamp: "4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube" p.4-93
1. Remove the three CR tape wires from the main board assembly.
2. Take the CR tape wires off the clamps nearby the main board, then pull them out through the R frame
cable inlet.
表 4-113
No. Part name

1 1 CR tape wire
2 Clamp
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-98

3. Take the CR tape wire off the clamp (one point) nearby the R frame cable inlet (I/H assembly side).
表 4-114
No. Part name

1
1 CR tape wire
2 Clamp
4. Remove the bearer holder-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 × 6: 2), then remove the bearer
holder.
表 4-115
1 No. Part name

1 Tube holder 2
2 Bearer holder and bearer
holder screw
6)
4-99 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5. Remove the tube holder 1 and the tube holder 2.
表 4-116
No. Part name

1 Tube holder 1
2 Tube holder 2
1 2
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-100

6. Remove the following parts from the I/H backing plate.

• Tube guide film
• Steel bearer assembly
• CR cable (3 cables)
表 4-117
No. Part name

1 Tube guide film
2 Steel bearer
1
3 CR cable
2
7. Replace the CR cable.

NOTE
When connecting the CR cable, note the following.
• The CR cable has three layers. Make sure to match the corresponding connector numbers.
• Remove or insert the CR cable terminal perpendicularly to the CR board connector. Pulling or
pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the connectors.
• Replace and use new terminal if it is damaged.
4-101 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.11 Replacing Accessory Unit

4.11.1 Replacing Level Switch (Waste Fluid)
1. Remove the level switch (waste fluid) from connector.
表 4-118
No. Part name

1 1 Level switch (waste fluid)
VJ16
2 Connector
2. Remove the level switch (waste fluid) from the cap of the waste fluid bottle assembly.
3. Remove the level switch (waste fluid).
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-102

4.12 Replacing Take Up Unit

This section describes the procedure to replace the Take Up unit.
NOTE
Have two or more people to replace the part of take up unit.
4.12.1 Removing Tension Arm

1. Remove the two screws (hexagon socket pan flat head M4 × 8) retaining tension arm R.
表 4-119
No. Part name

1 Tension arm R
2 2 Screw that retains the Tension
arm R (hexagon socket pan flat
head M4 × 8)
1
2. Remove the tension arm L from tension fulcrum shaft.
表 4-120
No. Part name

1 1 Tension arm L
2 Tension fulcrum shaft
2
3. Remove the tension arm.

4-103 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

NOTE
If the scroller is not in an horizontal position after the installation, loosen the fixing screw for scroller
height. Loosen the screw for scroller height adjustment to adjust the horizontal balance.
3
5
2
3
3 1
1
2
No. Part name

1 Take up Unit
2 Scroller receiver
3 Scroller
4 Scroller height fixing screw
5 Scroller height adjustment screw
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-104

4.12.2 Removing Take Up Unit Fixing Plate

1. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head bolt M4 × 10: 4 pieces) that retain the take up unit fixing plate
on the origin side.
表 4-121
2
No. Part name
1 Take up fixing bracket
2 Screw that retains the take up
unit fixing plate (hexagon socket
head bolt M4 × 10)
3 Take up unit fixing plate
2 1 3 2
2. Remove the take up unit fixing plate.

3. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head bolt M4 × 10: 4 pieces) that retain the adjuster attachment hook.
表 4-122
No. Part name

head bolt M4 × 10)
2 1
4. Remove the adjuster attachment hook.
4-105 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head bolt M4 × 10: 4 pieces) that retain take up fixing plate on the
opposite of the origin side.
表 4-123
2
No. Part name
1 Take up base L
head bolt M4 × 10)
1 2 3
6. Remove the take up unit fixing plate.

4.12.3 Removing Take Up Unit Cover
NOTE
Lower the release lever to the FREE side before removing the take up unit cover.
1. Remove the screw (set screw: 1) that retains the knob.
表 4-124
No. Part name

2 1 Knob
2 Screws that retain the knob (set
screw)
2. Remove the screws (pan head small screw M3 × 8: 2 pieces) that retain the rubber foot.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-106

表 4-125
No. Part name

1
1 Rubber foot
2 Screws that retain the rubber
foot (pan head small screw M3 ×
8)
2 1
4-107 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. Detach the lever from the release cam.
表 4-126
No. Part name

1
1 Release cam
2 Lever
4. Remove the screws (binding head small screw M3 × 5: 7 pieces) that retain the take up unit cover.
表 4-127
2
No. Part name
1 Take up Unit cover
1 2 Screws that retain the take up
unit cover (binding head small
screw M3 × 5)
5. Remove the take up unit cover.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-108

4.12.4 Replacing Scroller
(1) Replacing Holding Roller

1. Remove the E ring (E-6) that retains the holding roller using a driver.
表 4-128
No. Part name

1 holding roller
2 E ring that retains the holding
roller (E-6)
1 2
2. Remove the holding roller and the bearing.

3. Fit the E ring (E-6) to the holding axis using a long-nose pliers.
(2) Replacing Holding Roller L

1. Remove the screw that retains the holding roller L on the scroller receiver (left).
表 4-129
No. Part name

2
1 Holding roller L
3 2 Screws that retain the holding
roller L
3 Scroller receiver (left)
1
2
2. Remove the scroller receiver (left).

4-109 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(3) Replacing Drive Collar

1. Remove the screws (round head spring screw M3 × 8: 2 pieces) that retain the drive collar on the take up
unit scroller (left).
表 4-130
No. Part name

2 1 Drive collar
3 2 Screws that retain the drive

collar (round head spring screw
M3 × 8)
3 Take up Unit scroller (left)
2. Remove the drive collar.

4.12.5 Replacing VJ Take Up Unit CNT Board Assembly
(1) Removing Board Chassis

1. Remove the screws (round head spring screw M3 × 6: 4 pieces) that retain the board chassis on the chassis
(out).
表 4-131
No. Part name

1 Board chassis
2
2 Screws that retain the board
chassis (round head spring
screw M3 × 6)
3
3 Chassis (out)
1
2
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-110

2. Detach the motor cable, W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
connector to the VJ take up unit CNT board assembly that appears.
表 4-132
No. Part name

1 VJ take up unit CNT board
2 assembly
1 2 Motor cable
3 W_ON sensor relay assembly,
the W_OFF sensor relay
assembly
3
4-111 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Replacing VJ Take Up Unit CNT Board Assembly
NOTE
Remove the screw that retains the board chassis.
"(1) Removing Board Chassis" p.4-109
1. Remove the cable of the DC cable assembly and the VJ take up unit SW board assembly from the
connector to the VJ take up unit CNT board assembly.
表 4-133
No. Part name

2
3 assembly
1
2 DC cable assembly
3 VJ take up unit SW board
assembly
2. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M3 × 6: 4 pieces) that retain the VJ take up unit
CNT board assembly on the board chassis.
表 4-134
2
No. Part name
assembly
2 Screws that retain the VJ take up
1 unit CNT board assembly
(round head spring screw
finishing M3 × 6)
3 Board chassis
3
2
3. Remove the VJ take up unit CNT board assembly.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-112

(3) Replacing Power Board Assembly (of take up unit section for foreign use)
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the power board assembly.
1. Detach the AC cable assembly and the DC cable assembly from the connector to the power board
assembly (of take up unit section for foreign use).
表 4-135
No. Part name

1 Power board assembly (of take
up unit section for foreign use)
2 AC cable assembly
1 2
3 DC cable assembly
3
2. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M 4 × 8: 4 pieces) that retain the power supply
cover on the hexagon spacer.
表 4-136
1 No. Part name

1 Power supply cover
2 Screws that retain the power
supply cover (round head spring
2 screw finishing M 4 × 8)
2
3 Hexagon spacer
3. Detach the hexagon spacers (4 pieces) from the power board assembly.
4. Detach the power board assembly (of take up unit section for foreign use) from the board chassis.
4-113 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(4) Replacing VJ Take Up Unit SW Board Assembly
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the VJ take up unit SW board
assembly.
1. Detach the cable of the VJ Take Up Unit SW Board Assembly from the connector to the VJ take up unit
CNT board assembly.
表 4-137
1
No. Part name
assembly
2 Cable of the VJ take up unit SW
2 board assembly
2. Remove the screws (flat head small screw M3 × 6: 2 pieces) that retain the SW mounting plate on the
board chassis.
表 4-138
1 2
No. Part name
1 SW mounting plate
2 Screws that retain the SW
mounting plate (flat head small
3 screw M3 × 6)
3 Board chassis
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-114

3. Remove the screws (pan head small screw M3 × 8: 4 pieces) that retain the VJ take up unit SW board
assembly on the SW mounting plate.
表 4-139
2 1
No. Part name
1 VJ take up unit SW board
assembly
3 Screw that retains the VJ take up
2
unit SW board assembly (pan
head small screw M3 × 8)
3 SW mounting plate
4. Remove the VJ take up unit SW board assembly.

4-115 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(5) Replacing AC Cable Assembly
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the AC cable assembly.
1. Remove the cable of the VJ take up unit SW board assembly from the connector to the VJ take up unit
CNT board assembly.
表 4-140
No. Part name

1 assembly
2 Cable of the VJ take up unit SW
board assembly
2. Detach the AC cable assembly from the connector to the power board assembly (of take up unit section
for foreign use).
表 4-141
No. Part name

1 up unit section for foreign use)
2 AC cable assembly
3. Replace the AC cable assembly.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-116

(6) Replacing DC Cable Assembly
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the DC cable assembly.
1. Remove the screws that retain the DC cable assembly on the board chassis (round head spring screw
finishing M4 × 8: 2 pieces).
表 4-142
No. Part name

3 1 DC cable assembly
2 Screws that retain the DC cable
assembly (round head spring
screw finishing M4 × 8)
2
3 Board chassis
2. Detach the DC cable assembly from the connector to the power board assembly (of take up unit section
for foreign use).
表 4-143
1
No. Part name
2 up unit section for foreign use)
2 DC cable assembly
3. Cut the KI tie that retain the DC cable assembly to replace the DC cable assembly.
4. To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure. Retain the DC cable assembly using the KI tie.
4-117 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4.12.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor
(1) Replacing W_ON Sensor Relay Assembly, W_OFF Sensor Relay Assembly
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing W_ON sensor relay assembly or
W_OFF sensor relay assembly.
1. Remove the cable of the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
表 4-144
1
No. Part name
assembly
2
2 Cable of W_ON sensor relay
assembly and W_OFF sensor
relay assembly
2. Detach the W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the CR_HP sensor
and the lever sensor.
表 4-145
1
No. Part name
1 CR_HP sensor, lever sensor
2 W_OFF sensor relay assembly
3. Replace the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-118

(2) Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the CR_HP sensor or the lever
sensor.
1. Remove the cable of the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
表 4-146
1
No. Part name
assembly
2 2 W_ON sensor relay assembly,

W_OFF sensor relay assembly
2. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M3 × 6: 2 pieces) that retains the sensor mounting
plate (87NX) on the right of the inside chassis.
表 4-147
3
No. Part name
1 Sensor mounting plate (87NX)
2 Screws that retains the sensor
mounting plate (87NX) (round
1 head spring screw finishing M3
(Rear side)
× 6)
3 Right of the inside chassis
4-119 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. Detach the W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the CR_HP sensor
and lever sensor.
表 4-148
1
No. Part name
1 CR_HP sensor, the lever sensor
2 W_OFF sensor relay assembly
4. Detach the CR_HP sensor and the lever sensor from the sensor mounting plate (87NX).
表 4-149
2
No. Part name
1 Sensor mounting plate (87NX)
2 CR_HP sensor, the lever sensor
1
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-120

4.12.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take Up Unit Motor Assembly
(1) Replacing Drive Roller

1. Remove the flat head screws (set screw (top cup point) M4 × 6: 2 pieces) that retain the drive roller on
the drive axis C.
表 4-150
No. Part name

1 Drive roller
1 2 Screws that retain the drive

roller (set screw (top cup point)
M4 × 6)
3 Drive axis C
2 3
2. Remove the drive roller.
(2) Replacing VJ Take Up Unit Motor Assembly
CAUTION
Do not touch the motor right after starting-up the plotter. Otherwise, you may be burned.
NOTE
Remove the following parts before replacing the VJ take up unit motor assembly.
• Take Up Unit cover: "4.12.3 Removing Take Up Unit Cover" p.4-105
• Screw for the board chassis: "(1) Removing Board Chassis" p.4-109
4-121 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

1. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M4 × 10: 3 pieces) that retain the motor mounting
plate on the right of the inside chassis.
表 4-151
2
No. Part name
1 Motor mounting plate
2 Screws that retain the motor
1 mounting plate (round head
spring screw finishing M4 × 10:
3 3 pieces)
3 Right of the inside chassis
2
2. Detach the chain from the sprocket large.
表 4-152
1
No. Part name
1 Sprocket large
2 Chain
2
3. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M4 × 6:2 pieces) that retain the axis holder on the
motor mounting plate.
表 4-153
No. Part name

3
1 Axis holder
2 Screws that retains the axis
holder (round head spring screw
1 finishing M4 × 6)
3 Motor mounting plate
2
4. Remove the bearings.
5. Replace the VJ take up unit motor assembly.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-122

4-123 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4-124

5 Self-Diagnosis Mode
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2 Preparation .............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine ............................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up ..................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode ...................................................... 5- 6
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode ..................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu ....................................... 5-8
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu ...................................................................... 5- 10
5.5 Inspection Menu.................................................................................... 5- 11
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu ...................................................................... 5-12
5.5.2 Version Menu............................................................................... 5-13
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu ................................................................. 5-14
5.5.4 Sensor Menu ............................................................................... 5-15
5.5.5 Encoder Menu ............................................................................. 5-17
5.5.6 Fan Menu..................................................................................... 5-17
5.5.7 History Menu................................................................................ 5-18
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu ................................................................. 5-21
5.6 Ink Charging Menu................................................................................ 5- 22
5.7 Adjustment Menu.................................................................................. 5- 23
5.7.1 CR Return Position Adjustment Menu ......................................... 5-25
5.7.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu ........................................................... 5-26
5.7.3 Skew Check Menu ....................................................................... 5-28
5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu .............................................................. 5-29
5-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.7.5 Voltage Adjustment ...................................................................... 5-33
5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High Adjustment ........................................ 5-36
5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu ..................................................... 5-42
5.7.8 Test Printing Menu ....................................................................... 5-43
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu.......................................................................... 5-44
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu............................................ 5-45
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu ............................................................... 5-46
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu ........................................................................... 5-47
5.8 Cleaning Menu .......................................................................................5- 48
5.9 Sample Printing Menu ...........................................................................5- 49
5.9.1 Adjustment pattern ALL ................................................................ 5-50
5.9.2 Parameter ALL ............................................................................. 5-50
5.9.3 Error history .................................................................................. 5-50
5.9.4 Dot pattern.................................................................................... 5-51
5.10 Time Check ............................................................................................5- 52
5.11 Parameter Menu.....................................................................................5- 52
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu ....................................................... 5-53
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu .............................................................. 5-56
5.12 Servo Setting .........................................................................................5- 64
5.13 Endurance Running Menu ....................................................................5- 67
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu.......................................................... 5-68
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu .......................................................... 5-69
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu................................................................ 5-70
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu ................................. 5-71
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-2

5.13.5 General Endurance Menu............................................................ 5-72
5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu ................................................ 5-73
5.14 Media Feed Menu .................................................................................. 5- 73
5.15 ExControl Menu .................................................................................... 5- 74
5.15.1 Version......................................................................................... 5-74
5.15.2 Sensor ......................................................................................... 5-75
5.15.3 Heater .......................................................................................... 5-76
5.15.4 History.......................................................................................... 5-76
5.16 PaperInitial Menu .................................................................................. 5- 77
5-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis function adjusts the printing accuracy. It is used in the manufacturing process, adjustment,
and maintenance.
The self-diagnosis function is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
5.2 Preparation
Before you can use the self-diagnosis function, you must make the machine ready to call up the self-diagnosis
menu.
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine

Before starting up the self-diagnosis function, perform the following preparations.
(1) Setting Printing Media

Set a roll media for adjustment.
NOTE
• In the self-diagnosis menu display status, the media type is automatically set to roll media.
• During adjustment, use coated paper for the media.
(2) Connecting Power Cable

Connect the power cable to the machine’s inlet assembly and insert the power plug into an outlet.
NOTE
Do not connect three or more power plugs to one outlet.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-4

5.2.2 Starting Up
To use the self-diagnosis function, you must first call up the self-diagnosis menu on the operation panel.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and self-diagnosis display
mode. To call up the self-diagnosis menu, follow the steps below.
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the self-

diagnosis menu mode, press [Power] key to turn
the printer off.
2. While holding down [Setting/value -] key,
[Setting/value +] key and [>] key in the operation
panel simultaneously, press [Power] key.
The system will enter the self-diagnosis mode
and display the self-diagnosis menu.
5-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode

This section explains how to operate in the self-diagnosis mode as well as providing the list of available
diagnosis items.
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode

Follow the operation flow shown below to operate the self-diagnosis mode.
TIP
For more detailed operation steps, refer to the flow chart of the applicable diagnosis item.
1. Press [<] key or [>] key in the operation panel to

select the item to be diagnosed, and press [Enter]
key.
• The item is selected.
• If the item has a sub menu, the sub menu is
displayed.
2. When the LCD monitor in the operation panel

indicates a setting value, the value can be
modified.
Press [Setting/value +] key or [Setting/value -]
key in the operation panel to modify the value.
3. To save the modified value, press [Enter] key in

the operation panel.
The modified set value is stored and the next item
is displayed
NOTE
If you press [Cancel] key, or, [Setting/value
+] key or [Setting/value -] key, instead of
[Enter] key, the modification is not stored.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-6

4. To quit the diagnosis, press [Cancel] key in the

operation panel.
The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the
diagnosis menu.
5. To exit the self-diagnosis menu, press [Power]

key.
5-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu

The self-diagnosis menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Diagnosis item Contents Reference

Platen Adjustment Performs temperature setting for the pre-heater and platen "5.4 Platen
Menu heater to 30 °C. Adjustment Menu"
p.5-10
Inspection Menu Performs various inspections on the memory, version, "5.5 Inspection
operation panel, sensors, encoders, fans, and head waveform. Menu" p.5-11
Also, displays the inspection records of above items.
Ink Charging Menu Performs ink charging. "5.6 Ink
Charging Menu"
p.5-22
Adjustment Menu Performs various adjustments for the printer mechanism. "5.7
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-23
Cleaning Menu Performs cleaning of the print head. "5.7.11 Feed
Pitch Check Menu"
p.5-46
Print Menu Performs sample printing necessary for adjustment. "5.9 Sample
Printing Menu" p.5-
49
Time Check Menu Confirming the time of the printer. "5.10 Time
Check" p.5-52
Parameter Menu Configures various adjustment parameters. "5.11
Parameter Menu"
p.5-52
Servo Menu Performs adjustment for the servo motor. "5.12 Servo
Setting" p.5-64
Endurance Running Performs endurance running of the printer mechanism. "5.13
Menu Endurance Running
Menu" p.5-67
Media feed Menu Feeds media into the printer forward or backward. "5.14 Media
Feed Menu" p.5-73
ExControl Menu Diagnoses the controller board, sensors, heater check. "5.15 ExControl
Also, displays the diagnosed records of above items. Menu" p.5-74
PaperInitial Menu Performs initialization and media detection setting. "5.16
PaperInitial Menu"
p.5-77
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-8

[<] key
[Enter] key
Platen Adjustment Me
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key [Enter] key
Inspenction Menu
[Cancel] key
Ink Charging Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Cleaning Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Print Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Time Setting Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Menu
[Cancel] key
ࠪࡦ࠲ࠐࡦ㧦࡛࠙ࠪࡈࠖ࡯࠻ࠐ Servo Menu

[Cancel] key
Endurance Running M
[Cancel] key
Media Feed Menu
[Cancel] key
ExControl Menu
[Cancel] key
Paper Initial Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
5-9 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu

In the platen adjustment menu, you can set the temperature of the pre-heater and platen heater to 30 °C.
Parts assembly and adjustment should be done in the condition.
* This item displays platen temperature only.
[<] key
[Enter] key Pre-heater
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key PlatenHeater 1
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key PlatenHeater 2
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Fig. 5-1 If the heater temp. does not reach 30°C.
[<] key
[Enter] key Pre-heater
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key Platen Heater 1
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key Platen Heater 2
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Fig. 5-2 If the heater temp. reach 30°C.
NOTE
If the heater temp. reach 30 °C, buzzer sounds.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-10

5.5 Inspection Menu

In the inspection menu, you can perform various inspections on the circuit boards, sensors, and fans.
The inspection menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-1 Diagnosis Items for Inspection Menu

Diagnosis Contents Reference
item
Memory size Displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board assembly "5.5.1 Memory
Size Menu" p.5-12
Version Displays the versions of the firmware and MAIN board assembly "5.5.2 Version
• Firmware version Menu" p.5-13
• Backup parameter version
• Setting of dip switches
• Revision of MAIN board assembly
• CompanyCode setting
Operation Used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and "5.5.3
panel LED. Operation Panel
Menu" p.5-14
Sensor Displays the status of the following sensors. "5.5.4 Sensor
• CR_ORG sensor Menu" p.5-15
• Wiper sensor
• Cover sensor
• Lever sensor
• Head slide sensor
• Waste fluid box sensor
• P_EDGE sensor
• P_REAR sensor
• Head transistor thermistor sensor
• Head thermistor sensor
Encoder Displays the detected values from the following encoders. "5.5.5 Encoder
• CR (Carriage) Menu" p.5-17
• PF (Media feed)
Fan Used to check if the following fans operate normally by turning them "5.5.6 Fan
ON and OFF. Menu" p.5-17
• Suction fan
• Cooling fan
History Used to check the following records. Used to initialize the serious "5.5.7 History
error history. Menu" p.5-18
• Maintenance history
• Serious error history
Head Used to check the head-driving waveform. "5.5.8 Head
waveform Waveform Menu"
p.5-21
5-11 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

[<] key
[Enter] key Ram Capacity Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key Version Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key Panel Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key Sensor Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Encoder Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key Fan Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key History Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key [Enter] key Head Signal Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu

This menu displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board assembly.
[Cancel] key
Test Menu
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-12

5.5.2 Version Menu

This menu displays the following contents about the firmware and MAIN board assembly.
• Firmware version
• Backup parameter version
• Setting of dip switches of MAIN board assembly
• Revision of MAIN board assembly
• CompanyCode setting
TIP
Settings for the DIP switch on the MAIN board assembly are displayed as follows:
• ON: 0, OFF:1
• Switch No. 1: LSB
• Switch No. 2: MSB
[<] key
Firmware version
[>] key [<] key
Backup parameter version
[>] key [<] key
Setting of DIP switches
of main board assembly
[>] key [<] key
Revision of main board assembly
[>] key
CompanyCode setting
5-13 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu

This menu is used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and LEDs.
(1) Operation Panel Key Check

When you press a key in the operation panel, the name of the key is displayed on the LCD. To exit the
operation panel key check, press [Cancel] key twice.
(2) LCD Check

The entire LCD screen is filled in black. You can check for any missing dots.
(3) LED Check

The following LEDs light up in order. The LCD displays the name of the LED that is currently illuminated
• Power lamp
• Data lamp
• High lamp
• Low lamp
• Wave lamp
• Strong lamp
• Normal lamp
• Economy lamp
[<] key Operation Panel Key Check

[Enter] key
[Cancel] key (twice)

[>] key [<] key LCD Check
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key LED Check
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-14

5.5.4 Sensor Menu

This menu displays the sensor status on the operation panel.
If the displayed sensor status does not match the actual machine status, replace or adjust the relevant sensor
referring to the table below.
Table 5-2 Inspection Items in Sensor Menu

No. Sensor name Status in display Reference
1 CR_HP sensor ON / OFF "4.5.2 Replacing CR Origin
Point Sensor" p.4-52
2 Waste fluid tank sensor ON / OFF -
3 Wiper sensor ON / OFF

4 Cover sensor Open / Close -
5 Lever sensor Up / Down "4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor"

p.4-54
6 P_EDGE sensor 0 to 255 "7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor
Sensitivity Adjustment" p.7-45
7 P_REAR sensor 0 to 255 "7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor
Adjustment" p.7-48
8 Headgap Low / High -
9 Head ** ºC "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head"

p.4-61
10 Transistor1, 2 ** ºC -
NOTE
• For the following sensors, the sensor sensitivity is displayed in decimal number.
• P_EDGE sensor
• P_REAR sensor
5-15 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

[<] key
CR_HP Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Waste Fluid Tank Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Wiper Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Cover Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Lever Sensor
[>] key [<] key
P_EDGE Sensor
[>] key [<] key
P_REAR Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Head Gap Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Head Sensor
[>] key [<] key

H Transistor 1
[>] key [<] key
H Transistor 2
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-16

5.5.5 Encoder Menu

This menu displays the detected values from the following encoders.
• CR_ENC (Carriage)
• PF_ENC (Media feed)
NOTE
For the encoder-detected values, the encoder pulse numbers are displayed in hexadecimal number.
[<] key
CR_ENC
[>] key [<] key
PF_ENC
[>] key
5.5.6 Fan Menu

This menu is used to check if the fans operate normally by turning them ON and OFF.
If this operation is selected, the fans operate as follows:
• Suction fan: Turns to ON.

• Cooling fan: Turns to OFF.
If you press [Cancel] key, the suction fan is deactivated and the cooling fan is resumed, and the display shifts
to "Inspection: Fan".
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-17 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.5.7 History Menu

This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history.
This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history and to initialize serious error history.
[<] key
Maintenance history
[>] key [<] key
Serious error history
[>] key [<] key
Initialization of the serious
[>] key communication
(1) Maintenance History

This displays the past maintenance records on the following components.
• Number of wiping cycle

• Number of CR motor activation cycles
• Number of PF motor activation cycles
• Number of printed copies
• Number of cleaning cycles
• Discharged amount of heads (K. C. M. Y)
• Pump count (number of pump wheel cycles)
• Number of lock solenoid downs
NOTE
All values of maintenance history are indicated in hexadecimal form.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-18

[<] key
Frequenc[ of the wiper blade used
[>] key [<] key
CR Motor driving (Unit : Operation count)
(Ink tube reciprocating count and the function)
[>] key [<] key
PF Motor driving (Unit : 10m)
[>] key [<] key

Frequenc[ of printing
[>] key [<] key
Frequenc[ of cleaning
[>] key [<] key
Head B1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
Head B2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
Head C1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
Head C2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
Head M1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
Head M2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
Head Y1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key

Head Y2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key

Frequenc[of the pump operation
(Pump wheel rotation count)
[>] key [<] key
Frequency of the lock solenoid moving down
[>] key
5-19 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Serious Error History

Indicates serious error history.
NOTE
• The serious error history does not include CPU error.
• The serious error history menu indicates the history up to 64.
[<] key
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧝㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧴㧱㧭㧰‫ޓ‬㧯㧭㧮㧸㧱
[>] key [<] key
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧞㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㧲‫ޓ‬㧹㧻㨀㧻㧾
[>] key [<] key
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧟㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㧲‫ޓ‬㧹㧻㨀㧻㧾
[>] key [<] key
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧠㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧾‫ޓ‬㧯㨁㧾㧾㧱㧺㨀
[>] key [<] key

㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧢㧠㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧾‫ޓ‬㧹㧻㨀㧻㧾
[>] key
(3) Error Initialization

This menu is used to initialize the serious error history.
[Enter] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-20

5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu

This menu is used to check the head-driving waveform.
* This function is used in factory only.
NOTE
• SHOT COUNT can be selected from 1 to 655.
• Magnification can be selected from the range of x1 - 100000. Nozzle can be selected among A -
H and ALL.
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[<] key
5-21 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.6 Ink Charging Menu

In the ink charging menu, you can charge ink.
The ink charging menu includes the following items.
Table 5-3 Ink Charging menu
Charging item Contents

InkCharge Performs initial ink charging.
LittleCharge Performs a small amount of ink charging.
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
* In “LittleCharge” process, the printer charges a small amount of ink, which is one-fourth of
“InkCharge” main suction steps.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-22

5.7 Adjustment Menu

In this menu, you can align the printing position and correct the media feed operation.
The adjustment menu includes the following diagnosis menus.
Table 5-4 Diagnosis Items in Adjustment Menu

CR return position Performs confirmation of the CR return position while
adjustment printing and adjustment.
Head nozzle check Prints out a printing to check the ink discharge "5.7.2 Head Nozzle
performance of the head nozzles. Check Menu" p.5-26
Skew check Performs media feed and detects the degree of skew in "5.7.3 Skew Check
media feed by the sensor. Menu" p.5-28
Head slant check Prints out a printing to check for print head slant "5.7.4 Head Slant
(horizontal and vertical direction). Mechanical Check Menu" p.5-29
adjustment must be performed as necessary.
Volt. Offset Adjusts the print position of VSD3 - small head. "5.7.5 Voltage
Adjustment" p.5-33
Uni-D / Bi-D Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance "5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment Low (Uni-D) of PG Low and the position of the repeated Low and High
printing. Adjustment" p.5-36
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Uni-D 240B: 240cps Banner
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240B: 240cps Banner
Uni-D / Bi-D Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance "5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment High (Uni-D) of PG High and the position of the repeated Low and High
printing. Adjustment" p.5-36
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Side margin Sets the side margin. "5.7.7 Side Margin
adjustment Adjustment Menu" p.5-
42
Test printing Prints out a head nozzle check pattern, an adjustment "5.7.8 Test Printing
pattern, adjustment parameters, serious error history or a Menu" p.5-43
dot pattern.
5-23 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 5-4 Diagnosis Items in Adjustment Menu (Continued)

HeadWash Cleans the tubes and heads using cleaning liquid. "5.7.9 HeadWash
Menu" p.5-44
Software counter Clears various software counters. "5.7.10 Software
initialization Counter Initialization
Menu" p.5-45
Feed amount check Used to check the media feed amount per band. "5.7.11 Feed Pitch
Check Menu" p.5-46
Solid print check Performs solid nozzle print check (color selection, nozzle "5.7.12 Solid Print
selection and print direction selection are available). Menu" p.5-47
[<] key
[Enter] key
CR Return Position Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Nozzle Check Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Check Skew Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Head Slant Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Voltage Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Low Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D High Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Side Margin Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Test Print Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Head Wash Menu
[Cancel] key
Software Counter Initialization Menu
[Cancel] key
Feed Pitch Check Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
Solid Print Menu
[Cancel] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-24

5.7.1 CR Return Position Adjustment Menu

In this menu, you can adjust the CR return position (near end position of the carriage) on the origin side.
“CR Return: Check”moves the carriage three times..
“CR Return: Input”adjusts the return position of the carriage.
[<] key
Confirms CR return position
[>] key [<] key
Adjusts CR return position
[>] key
Press [Setting/value +] or [Setting/value -]

to change the setting value.
(Range: -1.0 - 1.0mm, 0.1mm increment)
5-25 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.7.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu

In this menu, you can check if the head nozzles that has been charged can discharge ink correctly by printing
a sample printing. To check the head nozzle, follow the steps below.
1. Set media as necessary.

2. After media is set, the machine prints out head nozzle check patterns in the following modes.
• 1 pass, unidirectional
• PF: 360 dpi
• CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head nozzle check patterns for the following points.
• Ink nozzle discharge amount (omission, discontinuity, meandering)
• Satellite
• T fence
• Nozzle alignment in vertical direction
• Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction
Nozzle check: Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Vertical nozzle alignment check: Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Horizontal nozzle alignment check (CW direction): Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Horizontal nozzle alignment check (CCW direction): Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-26

4. If any abnormal conditions are found in the ink discharge status of the head nozzles, perform cleaning.
TIP
"5.8 Cleaning Menu" p.5-48
5. After cleaning, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Media set
If media is not set

Finish
printing
Displays during adjustment printing
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-27 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.7.3 Skew Check Menu

Feed the paper to check the skew size using sensor.
When you select this item from the Adjustment Menu, the printer feeds the loaded media by one pass and
checks difference of the media edge positions before and after the media feed detected by the sensor.
NOTE
Before performing skew check, ensure that the media is set correctly.
The printer determines the media setting reference position during first detection of media left edge.
Therefore, the media that is not set correctly may cause errors as below.
• Media error occurs during skew check and printer operation stops.
• During media initial operation after power is turned on or media is cut, "Undefined Paper"
frequently occurs.
0.1 m increments
0.1 mVQ10m
[Enter] key
If media is not set
Media set
Finish media initialization
Media edge detection finishes normaly
Table 5-5 Skew Amount Specification

Condition Specification
Roll media 7m 2.5 mm or less
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-28

5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu

Table 5-6 Head Slant Items
Items Contents
Head slant: slant Head slant check: horizontal direction
Head slant: vertical Head slant check: vertical direction
(1) Horizontal Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the horizontal direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.

2. After media is set, the printer prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
• 1 pass Uni-D
• PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
• Head slant
A: Check the point to check the slant.

B: Media feed direction
C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
$
#
OO
% & '
5-29 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-36
5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Display during adjustment printing
Finish printing
[<] key
Finishes printing
[>] key [<] key

Outputs pattern
[>] key
(2) Vertical Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the vertical direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.

2. After media is set, the machine prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
• 1 pass Uni-D
• PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
A: Check the point to check the vertical slant angle.
C: OK
D: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the right.
E: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the left.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-30

$ # $ # $ # $ #
%%9
$ # $ # $ # $ #
$ %9
% & '
4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)" p.7-38
5-31 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Finish printing
[<] key
Finishes printing
[>] key [<] key

Outputs pattern
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-32

5.7.5 Voltage Adjustment

This menu is used to adjust the voltage of VSD 3 small dot so that the print position will be corrected.
Check the small dot is on the center of the middle dots in the CR direction.
When adjusting, change the voltage up to 5V (0.1V increment) considering the current voltage as a basis.
NOTE
The default value is set a proper one so that genuine ink works fine.
Items Contents
240 CW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CW printing.
240 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CCW printing.
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-33 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

The following figure shows a case for 240 CW.
[Enter] key
If media is not set
Media set
If head gap is PG-Low
Change head gap (to PG-Low)

If the temperature of the pre-heater and
platen heater is below 42 C
Finish warm-up * Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Finish printing
Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key
to change unit to pulse
Volt range: -5V to 5V (0.1V)
VH3L-1 to VH3L-4

VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
Print pattern: 240 CW
2B 2A 1B 1A 2B 2A 1B 1A
CW
240CPS A
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-34

A: Print direction
B: Adjust the voltage so that the small dot printed positions (shown as dot-line) are the same with the
middle dot printed positions (in the CR direction).
C: Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
Items Speed
240 CW CW 240 CPS
320 CW CW 320 CPS
240 CCW CCW 240 CPS
320 CCW CCW 320 CPS
* Print pattern: Uni-D, 2-pass, 1A to 2B print

1st pass: prints middle dot
2nd pass: prints small dot
5-35 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High Adjustment

Adjusts the gap of the print heads (in the CR moving direction) when the head is in the PG Low or High and
the print position of the head in repeatability printing.
To adjust, perform printing in repeatability printing and correct CW and CCW printing positions by inputting
parameters.
*Check the print patterns of origin, center, and opposite side to adjust the gap equally.
Adjustment items are shown below.
Table 5-7 Uni-D / Bi-D menu items
Item Contents
Uni-D 240 Adjusts CW at 240 CPS. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320 Adjusts CW at 320 CPS. PG Low or High
Uni-D 240B Adjusts CW at 240 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320B Adjusts CW at 210 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240 Adjusts Bi-D at 240 CPS. PG Low or High
Bi-D 320 Adjusts Bi-D at 320 CPS. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240B Adjusts Bi-D at 240 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 320B Adjusts Bi-D at 320 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High
Table 5-8 Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment items
Item Contents
Set up Sets the selected parameter.
Print Prints pattern according to the selected item with the
(Print2 if “Bi-D” is current parameter.
selected)
Print1 Prints pattern according to the selected item with the
(Displayed only when current parameter, plus with the values of ±2 / ±4 / ±6 / ±8
“Bi-D” is selected.) to the current parameter.
Check the gap of those printed patterns.
The actual procedure is as follows.

2. After that, printer starts printing automatically.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-36

3. Check the printed pattern of CW adjustment.

• The following shows a case for Uni-D Low 240B Print.
Prints the pattern in the order of 1A to 4B.
Uni-Lo
240CPS A
-+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+
4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A
B C
A: Media feed direction
B: Adjust the setting value so that these point matches.
Uni-D 240: Uni- Lo/Hi 240 CPS
Uni-D 320: Uni- Lo/Hi 320 CPS
Uni-D 240B: Uni- Lo/Hi 240 CPS Banner
Uni-D 320B: Uni- Lo/Hi 320 CPS Banner
* Either “Lo” or “Hi” is displayed at where explained as “Lo/Hi” above.
• The following shows a case for Bi-D Low 240B Print1

Prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle.
* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Bi-Lo
240CPS A
-+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+
-8 -6 -4 -2 2A +2 +4 +6 +8
C
B

5-37 AP-74109 Rev 1.1


Bi-D 240: Bi- Lo/Hi 240 CPS
Bi-D 240B: Bi- Lo/Hi 240 CPS Banner

• The following shows a case for Bi-D Low 240B Print2
Prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle.
* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Bi-Lo
240CPS A
-+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+
4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A
B C

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-38

Check the print patterns of origin, center, and opposite side to adjust the gap equally.
If any abnormal conditions are found, identify the gap of the print positions and enter it as the CW
adjustment parameter.
After that, print test pattern again as necessary.
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240)
or “Adj 7: Uni/Bi High”
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key [Enter]
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key (When selecting Bi-D 240)
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-39 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(1) A case for “Print1” or “Print2” is selected.

* The sample image is in common with Bi-D and Uni-D.
Select “Print2” when adjusting Print 2
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to Low)
If the temperature of the preheater and platen
heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing

Finish Printing
Back to Uni-D/Bi-D Top menu
(2) A case for “Set up” (Uni-D 240) is selected.
[<] key
to change the setting value.
[>] key [<] key 1 pulse = 1/720 inch
Pulse range: -100 VQ 100
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-40

If Bi-D is selected, the parameter input process is as shown below.

(The following shows a case for “Bi-D 240 - Setup” is selected.)
[<] key Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key

to change unit to pulse‫ޓ‬
1 pulse = 1/2880 inch
[>] key [<] key Pulse range: -400 VQ400
Back to Uni㨺D/Bi-D Top menu
[>] key
NOTE
The default value is set a proper one so that genuine ink works fine.
5-41 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu

This menu is used to adjust the printing margins.
To adjust the margins, follow the steps below.

2. The printer detects the media size and the size is displayed on the operation panel.
3. The printer prints out band feed correction adjustment patterns and cuts the media in the following modes.
• Black, 1 pass, unidirectional, 360 dpi
* The pattern is printed with magenta if “Confirm” is selected.
4. Check the printed side margin adjustment patterns for the measurement.
TOP
1: Side margin
2: Media feed direction
5. Enter each measured value as the parameter.
(Input range: 0.0 to 6.0 mm (0.1 mm increments))
Press [Cancel] key to go back

to ̌Adj8: SideMargin̍Menu
Press [Setting/value+] or [Setting/value-] key

to select initialize or check
After pressing [Enter]key
After printing
Side Margin: 0.1㨙㨙 increments
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-42

5.7.8 Test Printing Menu

In this menu, you can print out adjustment patterns for checking various adjustment items.

2. After media is set, the machine prints out the following test printings.
• Nozzle check: Prints head nozzle check patterns.
• Nozzle check steps: Prints head nozzle check patterns of lines only.
• Adjustment parameters: Prints setting values for each adjustment item.
• Error history: Evaluates the serious error history.
3. Press the [Enter] key in the operation panel to start the selected test printing.
[<] key Printing adjustment pattern

[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-43 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.7.9 HeadWash Menu

This menu is used to purge ink and clean the heads at the end of the manufacturing process and before print
head replacement.
1. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to determine the Head Cleaning Menu.
2. Remove all ink cartridges.
3. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to discharge ink.
4. After ink is discharged, install the head cleaning jig.
5. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to charge shipping liquid.
6. After shipping liquid is charged, remove the head cleaning jig.
Remove all cartridges and press [Enter] key to discharge ink
Finish Ink Discharge
Set cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to charge shipping liquid
After shipping liquid is charged
Remove cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to discharge

shipping liquid
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-44

5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu

This menu is used to initialize the software counters such as the waste ink counter.
NOTE
The counters are initialized before delivery. Do not initialize them during maintenance.
The software counters that can be initialized through this menu are as follows.
Table 5-9 Software Counters to be Initialized

Counter Initial
value
Waste ink amount counter 0
Ink consumption counter K 0
Ink consumption counter C 0
Ink consumption counter M 0
Ink consumption counter Y 0
Cumulative print timer 0
User Ink-filling flag Not filled
Smartchip log None
Ink Not-filled flag Not filled
Pressing the [Enter] key in the operation panel performs the software counter initialization.
Pressing [Cancel] key cancels the initialization.
Adjustment Menu
[Enter] key
Finish initialization
5-45 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu

In this menu, you can check the media feed amount for one band by reviewing a sample printing.There is no
adjustment items.
To check the feed pitch, follow the steps below.

2. Select “Adj.: Send Pitch”.
3. Select the feed pitch.
• Pattern 1: Prints at intervals of 360 (720) dpi. This resolution causes no gaps.
• Pattern 2: Prints at intervals of 1440 dpi. This causes a gap in one line out of four lines.
4. Pattern 1 is printed as shown below.
Media feed amount

for one band
[<] key [Enter] key
[>] key [<] key Finish Printing or [Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-46

5.7.12 Solid Print Menu

This menu is used to print solid print patterns with head on both ends.
• Print pattern
5mm B
Specified color nozzles of both series A and B

Nozzles for series B only A
Nozzles for series A only
5mm 20mm

B: 100% printing
[<] key
Press [Setting/value +] or [Setting/value -] key
to select color to check
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
to select nozzle to eject ink
[>] key [<] key
ALL: All nozzles
ODD: Odd numbered nozzles
[>] key [<] key EVEN: Even numbered nozzles
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
to select color to check
[>] key [<] key
CW: Eject ink when CW scanning
CCW: Eject ink when CCW scanning
[>] key
5-47 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.8 Cleaning Menu

In this menu, you can clean ink from the print heads.
The cleaning menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-10 Diagnosis Items in Cleaning Menu

Diagnosis item Contents
Economy Performs economy cleaning.
Normal Performs normal cleaning.
Powerful Performs powerful cleaning.
[<] key [Enter] key

Economy Cleaning
[Cancel] key
Normal Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Strong Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-48

5.9 Sample Printing Menu

This menu prints out a sample printing.
The sample printing menu includes the following items.
Table 5-11 Diagnosis Items in Sample Printing Menu

Adjustment pattern ALL Prints adjustment pattern.
Parameter ALL Prints out the set values of various adjustment items.
Error history Prints serious error history.
Dot pattern Prints dot diameter check pattern.
NOTE
If you have not registered the serial number of the machine, you must enter the number before you
can start the adjustment variable printing.
[<] key Adjust Pattern printing

[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key Adjust Parameter printing

[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key Error record printing

[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key Dot diameter printing

[Enter] key
[>] key
5-49 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.9.1 Adjustment pattern ALL

Confirms printing and prints adjustment pattern.
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-Low
Change head gap (to PG-Low)

[>]key Finish warm-up * Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
[Cancel] Finish printing

If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to PG-High)
Finish warm-up * Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
5.9.2 Parameter ALL

Prints out the set values of various firmware adjustment parameters.
After pressing [Enter]key
5.9.3 Error history

Prints serious error history and smart chip log.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-50

5.9.4 Dot pattern

Prints dot diameter check pattern
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
Warming up starts after

parameters set
Finish warm-up
5-51 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.10 Time Check

Confirms the date and time controlled by RTC (Real Time Clock) on the MAIN board assembly.
NOTE
You cannot set the date and time using this menu. In that case, use the time setting function of
“MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant”.
"7.3.8 Date & Time Setting" p.7-31
[Enter] key
Press [Enter] or [Cancel] key to go back
to Time Check Menu
5.11 Parameter Menu

In this menu, you can modify the set values of various adjustment items (adjustment parameters).
The parameter menu includes the following items.
Table 5-12 Diagnosis Items in Parameter Menu

Initialization Initializes the adjustment parameters. "5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-53
Update Updates the adjustment parameters. "5.11.2 Parameter
Update Menu" p.5-56
[<] key [Enter] key

Parameter Initialization Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Update Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-52

5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu

This menu initializes the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be initialized through this menu are
as follows.
• Uni-D / Bi-D parameter, wiper, CR motor, PF motor, pump, waste ink

• Initialization of all items
[<] key [Enter]

key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-53 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(1) Voltage Offset

This menu updates the voltage offset parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-13 Voltage offset item
Items Contents
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-54

(2) Uni-D / Bi-D Low

This menu updates the Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment parameter.
or “Update 3: Uni/Bi High”
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-55 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu

This menu updates the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be updated through this menu are as
follows.
NOTE
The updated parameters will not be stored in the flash memory unless the system power is turned
OFF.
• CR return position
• Head rank
• Voltage offset
• Uni-D / Bi-D Low
• Uni-D / Bi-D High
• Side margin
• Not-filled flag
• Serial number
• Debug Bit
[<] key
[Enter] key
CR Return Position Update Menu
[Cancel] key
Head Parameter Update Menu
[Cancel] key
Head Voltage Offset Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Low Update Menu
[Cancel] key
Uni-D/Bi-D High Update Menu
[Cancel] key
Side Margin Update Menu
[Cancel] key
Ink Parameter Update Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Serial No.Update Menu
[>] key [Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Debug Bit Update Menu
[Cancel] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-56

(1) Head Rank

This menu updates the head rank parameters. The head rank is used to determine the print head driving
voltage and correct the head temperature.
After head rank is entered, the system shifts to the Ink Charge Menu.
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key Error will occur if input value is wrong.

Press [Enter] key to retry
[Cancel]
[Enter] key Initial Ink charge will not executed.
key
Head ID will be updated.
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
5-57 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Voltage Offset

This menu updates the voltage offset parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-14 Voltage offset item
Items Contents
240 CW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps. CW printing.
240 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps. CCW printing.
320 CW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 320 cps. CW printing.
320 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 320 cps. CCW printing.
[<] key
[>] keys [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
When it is 240 CW
VH3L-1 to VH3L-4
VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-58

(3) Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High

This menu updates the Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment parameter.
or “Update 4: Uni/Bi High”
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5-59 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(The following shows a case for “Uni-D 240” is selected.)
If any parameter has been changed
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
This menu updates the printing position alignment parameters.

(The figure shown below is a case for Bi-D 240)

[Enter]
key
[Enter] key
Change the value by [setting/balue+]
or [setting/value-]key
-400 to 400
*It will be #2 when PG High
(4) Side Margin

This updates the side margin parameters.
When any parameter has been changed
[Enter]
key
[Enter] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-60

(5) Ink Not-filled Flag

This updates the ink parameter. The setting items are as follows.
• User/: Charge; Cleaned, Ink not charged

• User/Init:Not Charge; Not Cleaned, Ink not charged
• User/Init:Charge; Cleaned, Ink charged
Change the value by pressing [+] or [-] key

”User/ : Charge”
”User/Init: Not Charge”
”User/Init: Charge”
[Enter] key
When any parameter has been changed
[Enter] key
NOTE
When selecting "Reset", be sure to install the cartridge.
5-61 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(6) Serial Number Entry

This is for entering the serial number.
Enter Serial Number (digit by digit)

[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-62

(7) Debug Bit update

Updates the debug bit. This is a trial function for firmware.
TIP
• Debug bit is displayed as a binary number. The factory-setting value and default value are as
follows.
• Factory-setting value: 000000
• Default value: 000000
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Input value (digit by digit)
Change the setting value by pressing
[>]key [<]key [+] or [-]key
[>]key [<]key
[>]key [<]key
[>]key [<]key
[>]key [<]key
[>]key [<]key
[>]key [<]key

[Enter]
NOTE
This function is not used in maintenance work.
5-63 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.12 Servo Setting

Changes the servo setting.
* Do not change the parameters. This menu is basically for checking printer trouble (noise or vibration) and
print quality.
Table 5-15 Servo setting item
Items Contents
240 cps CW Servo setting at CR CW direction, 240 cps
240 cps CCW Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 240 cps
320 cps CW Servo setting at CR CW direction, 320 cps
320 cps CCW Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 320 cps
Table 5-16 Servo adjustment item
Items Contents
Proportional gain Sets proportional gain/
Integral gain Sets integral gain
Low-pass filter Sets low-pass filter
PWM scale Sets PWM scale
ωC Sets ω C
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-64

[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key 㧔When selecting 240cps CW 㧕
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
='PVGT?MG[
Change the value (unit to count) by pressing

[+] or [-] key
The maximum / minimum / count value for each item is shown blow.
Items Max. Min. Count

GP 0 × 2000 0 × 7800 0 × 200
GI 2 0 × 800 1
GLPF 255 1
PWM 10 15 1
ωC 30 60 5
5-65 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

The initial set value for each item is shown below.

If the speed is same, the initial value for CW and for CCW will be the same.
Table 5-17 Initial value for Servo setting

Items Initial value
at 240 cps at 320cps
GP 0 × 5400 0 × 4e00
GI 0 × 40 0 × 30
GLPF 228 219
PWM 13 13
ωC 45 45
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-66

5.13 Endurance Running Menu

Performs endurance running of mechanicals and the head.
The endurance running menu includes the following items.
Table 5-18 Diagnosis Items in Endurance Running Menu

CR motor Performs carriage stroke. "5.13.1 CR Motor
Endurance Menu" p.5-
68
PF motor Drives the PF motor. "5.13.2 PF Motor
69
Pump Drives the pump motor assembly. "5.13.3 Pump
70
Nozzle print Performs sequential print operation of the print head. "5.13.4 Print Head
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-71
General endurance Performs endurance running on the CR and PF "5.13.5 General
concurrently. Endurance Menu" p.5-
72
Confirmation Confirms the number of endurance running cycles. "5.13.6 Endurance
Running Check Menu"
p.5-73
[<] key [Enter] key

CR Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
PF Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Pump Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Sequential Printing Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
General Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Endurance Running Check Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
5-67 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the CR motor.
You can operate the carriage stroke according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-19 Set Items in CR Motor Endurance Menu

Set item Contents Set value Remark
Running speed (CW, Set the carriage running speed 100, 120, 160, 200, Unit: cps
CCW) (CW direction, CCW direction) 240, 320, 400
Number of endurance Set the number of endurance -1 to 10000
running cycles running cycles
CAUTION
When the CR motor endurance running is performed, note the following;

• Install available ink cartridges.
If the CR motor endurance running is performed without ink cartridges, ink inside the tube
may leak through the ink holder during the carriage movement.
TIP
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats endurance
running until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If the
number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
• The carriage moving distance is fixed to the maximum value of print area.
CW-speed
[Enter] key
CCW-speed
[Enter] key
Endurance Count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance
[Enter] or [Cancel] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-68

5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the PF motor.
You can drive the PF motor according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-20 Set Items in PF Motor Endurance Menu

Media feed amount Set the media feed amount 0.1 to 100 Unit: mm
per endurance running
cycle
Number of endurance Set the number of -1 to 10000
running cycles endurance running cycles
TIP
• The following table shows the motor moving parameters to media feed amount.
Speed 35CPS
Acceleration 0.1G
Deceleration 0.1G
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If the
number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
Media feed amount

[Enter] key
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance
5-69 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the pump motor assembly.
You can drive the pump motor assembly according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-21 Set Items in Pump Motor Assembly Endurance Menu

Running speed Set the running speed of Super High / High /
pump motor assembly. Normal
Number of endurance Set the number of endurance -1 to 10000
running cycles running cycles
TIP
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If
the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
[<] key
[Enter]
[>] key [<] key key
[Enter]
[>] key [<] key key
[Enter]
[>] key [<] key key
[Enter]
[>] key key
Endurance Count
Performing Endurance [Enter] key
[Enter] or [Cancel ] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-70

The pump endurance running sequence is as follows.
1. Pump endurance running starts.

2. Pump phase detection is performed.
3. Rotates with the specified suction speed. This rotation is counted as one cycle.
Step 2 above is repeated the number of times specified as follows.
Super High 4000
High 3000
Normal 2000
Low 1000
4. Pump release is performed.
5. Pump endurance running ends.
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the plot head.
You can operate the plot head according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-22 Set Items in Sequential Plotting Endurance Menu

TIP
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance running
5-71 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.13.5 General Endurance Menu

This menu performs the general endurance running.
You can operate various driving systems according to your desired settings.
The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-23 Set Items in General Endurance Menu

Running speed (CW, Set the carriage running 100, 120, 160, 200, 240m Unit: cps
CCW) speed (CW direction, 320, 400
CCW direction)
Media feed amount Set the media feed 0.1 to 100 Unit: mm
amount per cycle
TIP
• In the general endurance menu, the following operations are performed as one cycle of endurance
running
• Carriage stroking: 1 stroke
• Media feed: 1 cycle
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats stroking
until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
CW-speed
[Enter] key
CCW-speed
[Enter] key
Media feed amount
[Enter] key
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance running
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-72

5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu

In this menu, you can confirm the number of endurance running cycles that have been already finished.
The number of endurance running cycles is stored in NVRAM in the system. Therefore, even if a serious error
occurs during endurance running, you can confirm the number of finished cycles just before the occurrence
of the serious error.
[<] key
Number of endurance running cycles
for the CR Motor
[>] key [<] key
for the PF Motor
[>] key [<] key
for the Pump motor
[>] key [<] key
for Sequential Printing
[>] key [<] key
Number of general endurance running cycles
[>] key
5.14 Media Feed Menu

In this menu, you can feed media into the printer frontward or backward.
The mechanical initialization should be done if it is not performed yet.
5-73 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.15 ExControl Menu

In this menu, you can diagnose the equipment on the controller board.
Table 5-24 Controller Board Check Item
Items Contents Remark

Version Firmware, board revision -
Sensors Pre-heater thermistor, platen heater thermistor 1 and 2, -
after-heater thermistor, ink ID for each cartridges, ink
NOT sensor for each cartridge, ink END sensor for each
ink.
Heater Pre-heater, platen heater, after-heater -
History Maintenance history confirmation -
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5.15.1 Version
In this menu, you can check the ROM version of the controller board firmware, and the version of the
controller board. The firmware version (AP version) is displayed as “XX.XX“. The controller board version
is displayed in hex format (2 digit).
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-74

5.15.2 Sensor
The status of the following sensors on the controller board is displayed.
• Pre-heater thermistor sensor

• Platen heater thermistor sensor 1 and 2
• After-thermistor sensor
• Ink ID for each ink sensor
• Ink NOT sensor for each ink cartridge
• Ink END sensor for each ink
[<] key
Pre-heater condition display
[>] key [<] key

Platen Heater1 condition display
[>] key [<] key

Platen Heater2 condition display
[>] key [<] key

After Dryer heater condition display
[>] key [<] key
K Ink ID condition display
[>] key [<] key
C Ink ID condition display
[>] key [<] key
M Ink ID condition display

[>] key [<] key
Y Ink ID condition display
[>] key [<] key
Ink NOT sensor condition display
[>] key [<] key
Ink END sensor condition display
[>] key
5-75 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5.15.3 Heater
In this menu, you can check whether pre-heater, platen heater, and after-heater works properly or not. The
printer sets the temperature at 50°C and controls the selected heater process. Press [Cancel] key to stop the
operation.
If the temperature reaches to the set value, the printer keeps the temperature control.
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key㧔When selecting Pre㧕
5.15.4 History
You can check the maintenance history of the controller board control device. The history is displayed in H
(hour) / M (min.) / S (sec.).
Total operating time of each heater shows the period from when the printer is used in self-diagnosis mode.
Daily operating time is not counted.
[<] key
Time of using Pre-heater
[>] key [<] key
Time of using Platen Heater

[>] key [<] key
Time of using After Dryer Heater
[>] key
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-76

5.16 PaperInitial Menu

In this menu, you can set the media detection method in the self-diagnosis mode. The default value is the same
as the one in the normal operation mode.
Select either Top & Width / Width / Off. When Off is selected, you can set the media width in the media width
setting menu.
Table 5-25 Media Detection Item
Items Contents
Top & Width Normal media detection mode
Width Detects media width.
Off Does not detects media.
[-] key
Press the [+] or [-] key
to change the selection.
[+] key [-] key
[+] key [-] key
[+] key
When set OFF

Set the paper width by pressing
[+] or [-] key.
Setting range: 210 - 1225 mm
5-77 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 5-78

6 Maintenance Mode 2
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2....................................................... 6- 2
6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2 ............................................ 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2..................................................... 6-3
6.3 Maintenance Menu.................................................................................. 6- 3
6.3.1 Counter Display Menu ................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu ............................................................ 6-6
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu........................................................................ 6-8
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu .......................................................................... 6-8
6-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

6.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the maintenance mode2.
The maintenance mode2 provides the user with functions of displaying and initializing the life counters. It is
used in the manufacturing process, adjustment, and maintenance.
The maintenance mode2 is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2

This section explains how to start up and operate the maintenance mode2 as well as provides the list of
available diagnosis items.
6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2

To use the maintenance mode 2, you must first call up the maintenance menu on the operation panel.
The maintenance menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and setup menu display
mode. To run the maintenance menu, follow the steps below.
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the setup

menu mode, press the [Power] key to turn the
power off.
2. While holding down [>] key, [Setting/Value-]
key and [<] key in the operation panel
simultaneously, press [Power] key.
The maintenance mode will start running and
display the maintenance menu.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 6-2

6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2

"5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-6
6.3 Maintenance Menu

The maintenance menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 6-1 Diagnosis Items in Maintenance Menu

Counter: Indication Displays the life counter "6.3.1 Counter Display
Menu" p.6-4
Counter: Init Counter Initializes the life counter "6.3.2 Counter
Initialization Menu" p.6-6
Counter: Print Prints the life counter values "6.3.3 Counter Print
Menu" p.6-8
PaperFeed Feeds media into the printer frontward or backward "6.3.4 Media Feed
Menu" p.6-8
[<] key
[Enter] key
Counter display
[Cancal] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Counter initialization
[Cancal] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Counter print
[>] key [Cancal] key
[<] key [Enter] key
Media feed
[Cancal] key
[>] key
6-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

6.3.1 Counter Display Menu

This menu displays the life counters. It consists of the following diagnosis items.
NOTE
All life counters are displayed in decimal number.
Table 6-2 Diagnosis Items in Counter Display Menu

Used Ink K Displays the ink consumption (K) counter.
Used Ink C Displays the ink consumption (C) counter.
Used Ink M Displays the ink consumption (M) counter.
Used Ink Y Displays the ink consumption (Y) counter.
Print Number Displays the total number of printed copies.
Waste Ink Displays the waste ink amount counter.
CR Motor Displays the life counter of the CR motor.
PF Motor Displays the life counter of the PF motor.
PUMP Displays the life counter of the pump unit.
HEAD K1, K2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (K).
HEAD C1, C2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (C).
HEAD M1, M2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (M).
HEAD Y1, Y2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (Y).
Cleaner Displays the life counter of the cleaning unit.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 6-4

[<] key
Ink consumption (K) counter
[>] key [<] key

Ink consumption (C) counter
[>] key [<] key
Ink consumption (M) counter
[>] key [<] key
Ink consumption (Y) counter
[>] key [<] key

Total number of printed copies
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the CR motor
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the PF motor
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the pump unit
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (K1)

[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (K2)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (C1)

[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (C2)

[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (Y1)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (Y2)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (M1)

[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (M2)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the cleaner head
[>] key
6-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu

This menu initializes the life counters. The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are as follows.
Table 6-3 Diagnosis Items in Counter Initialization Menu

Print Num. Initializes the total print counter.
Ink Initializes the ink amount counter.
All Initializes the life counter.
NVRAM Initializes the NVRAM.
Timer Initializes the timer.
CR Motor Initializes the CR motor life counter.
PF Motor Initializes the PF motor life counter.
Head Unit Initializes the head nozzle life counter.
Cleaning Initializes the life counter of the cleaning unit.
PUMP Initializes the life counter of the pump unit.
Shipping Batch initializing before shipping
(Print Num., CR Motor, PF Motor, Cleaning, Pump)
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 6-6

[<] key [Enter]

key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
6-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

6.3.3 Counter Print Menu

This menu prints the life counter values.
[Enter] key
After media is set
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu

This menu feeds media into the printer frontward or backward.
The mechanical initialization should be performed, if it is not performed yet.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 6-8

VJ-1304 QUICK REFERENCE
7 Adjustment
7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 7- 3
7.2 Adjustment Item...................................................................................... 7- 3
7.3 Working with MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant..................... 7- 8
7.3.1 Parameter Backup ....................................................................... 7-12
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-12
7.3.3 Required Environment ................................................................. 7-12
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters.................................................................. 7-19
7.3.5 Firmware Installation.................................................................... 7-21
7.3.6 Sending Parameters .................................................................... 7-28
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation............................................................ 7-29
7.3.8 Date & Time Setting..................................................................... 7-31
7.4 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment.................................. 7- 32
7.4.1 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-32
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure ................................................................. 7-32
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment ...................................... 7- 33
7.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment ............................................................... 7- 35
7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) ................................................... 7- 36
7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) .......................................................... 7- 38
7.9 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment ........................................................ 7- 40
7.9.1 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-40
7.10 PG Height Adjustment.......................................................................... 7- 43
7-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7.10.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-43
7.10.2 Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 7-43
7.11 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment .................................................7- 45
7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ...................................... 7-45
7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment........................................................ 7-48
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-2

7.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on necessary adjustment items and procedures.
TIP
7.2 Adjustment Item

This section describes the adjustment items required in part replacement procedures.
When you adjust or replace any of the maintenance parts listed in “Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List”, you must
always adjust the printout quality using the self-diagnosis function referring to Table 7-1“Adjustment Item
List” (p.7-3).
Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List

Part replaced or Adjustment Adjustment item Reference
adjusted order
Printer head 1 Head rank input (including initial ink "(1) Head Rank"
charge) p.5-57
"5.6 Ink Charging
Menu" p.5-22
2 Head nozzle check "5.7.2 Head Nozzle
Check Menu" p.5-26
3 Head slant check (horizontal) "5.7.4 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-29
4 Head slant check (vertical) "5.7.4 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-29
5 Head slant adjustment (horizontal) "7.7 Head
Alignment (Horizontal
Height)" p.7-36
6 Head slant adjustment (vertical) "7.8 Head
Alignment (Vertical
Slant)" p.7-38
7 Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment "5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D
Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
8 Test printing "5.7.8 Test
Printing Menu" p.5-43
9 Reset of head unit life counter "5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-53
7-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List (Continued)

adjusted order
Main board 1 Parameter backup "7.3.1 Parameter
assembly Backup" p.7-12
2 Firmware installation "7.3.5 Firmware
Installation" p.7-21
3 Voltage input (no need for initial ink "(1) Head Rank"
charge) p.5-57
Check Menu" p.5-26
Adjustment" p.5-36
6 Side margin adjustment "5.7.7 Side Margin
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
7 P_REAR sensor position adjustment "7.11.2 P_REAR
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-48
8 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment "7.11 Media
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-45
CR motor assembly 1 CR belt tension adjustment "7.6 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-35
Adjustment" p.5-36
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-4


adjusted order
PF motor assembly 1 PF speed reduction belt tension "7.4 PF Speed
adjustment Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-32
2 PF encoder assemblyy position "7.5 PF Encoder
adjustment Assembly Position
Adjustment" p.7-33
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-48
P_EDGE sensor 1 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment "7.11 Media
assembly Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-45
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
P_REAR sensor 1 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment "7.11 Media
assembly Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-45
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-48
Cover sensor 1 Cover sensor assembly mounting "7.7 Head
assembly position adjustment Alignment (Horizontal
Height)" p.7-36
PF_ENC assembly 1 PF_ENC assembly mounting position "7.11 Media
adjustment Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-45
2 PF_ENC inspection "5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
7-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1


adjusted order
T fence 1 CR encoder inspection "5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
Adjustment" p.5-36
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
CR driven pulley 1 CR belt tension adjustment "7.6 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-35
Cutter holder 1 Cutter holder assembly mounting "7.9 Cutter Holder
assembly position adjustment Height Adjustment"
p.7-40
2 P_EDGE sensor adjustment "7.11.1 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-45
3 Print margin adjustment "5.7.7 Side Margin
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
Carriage assembly 1 CR belt tension adjustment "7.6 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-35
2 CR encoder inspection "5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
3 Cutter holder assembly mounting "7.9 Cutter Holder
position adjustment Height Adjustment"
p.7-40
4 P_EDGE sensor adjustment "7.11.1 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-45
5 Sequential printing endurance operation "5.13.4 Print Head
check Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-71
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-6


adjusted order
Carriage assembly 6 Head rank input "(1) Head Rank"
(Continued) p.5-57
"5.13.4 Print Head
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-71
7 Print margin adjustment "5.7.7 Side Margin
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
Check Menu" p.5-26
9 Head slant check (horizontal) "5.7.4 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-29
10 Head slant check (vertical) "5.7.4 Head Slant
Check Menu" p.5-29
11 Head slant adjustment (horizontal) "7.7 Head
Alignment (Horizontal
Height)" p.7-36
12 Head slant adjustment (vertical) "7.8 Head
Alignment (Vertical
Slant)" p.7-38
Adjustment" p.5-36
7-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7.3 Working with MUTOH Maintenance Engineer

Assistant
In this section, the operation of “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” is explained below.
On this printer, you can export and import the parameter settings, as well as installation of the firmware via
network by using dedicated software.
NOTE
For backing up/installing parameters or installing firmware, you can use either of the following
software. Follow the procedure corresponding to the software you will use.
• Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant: The explanation is described below. The existing printers
has been set up using this software.
• Mutoh Service Assistance: Newly built software. Some of the specification has been added and
revised.
"7.4 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance" p.3-30
CAUTION
Do not provide “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” to the customer because the
software can upload the printer parameter to computer.
In case of main board replacement, work in the following order.
1. Setting up working environment: "7.3.3 Required Environment" p.7-12

2. Receiving parameters: "7.3.4 Receiving Parameters" p.7-19
3. Replacing main board: "4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly" p.4-29
4. Setting DIP SW:
5. Transferring firmware to printer: "(2) Transferring Firmware" p.7-24
6. Confirming completion of installation to printer: "(3) Confirming Completion of Installation to
Printer" p.7-26
7. Sending parameters: "7.3.6 Sending Parameters" p.7-28
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-8

NOTE
You can skip operations 2, 3, 4, and 7 above if you upgrade the firmware version only.
Workflow for Firmware installation after MAIN board replacement
䎰 Confirm IP Adress of Printer Operation for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer

䎰 Assistant
䎳 Set IP Address of PC
䎳 Operation for operation panel
Maintenance work
䎳 Execute Board Manager mode
NO
䎰 Parameter settings
accessible?
YES
䎳 Save parameters
Replace MAIN board
Set DIP SW position to ON
䎳 Select default IP address
䎰 Install Firmware
䎰 Confirm Firmware installation
Parameters of old board NO

is saved?
YES
䎳 Initialize NV RAM
䎰 Send parameters to printer
䎳 Turn off printer 䎳 Input parameters manually
Set DIP SW position to OFF
End
7-9 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Workflow for Firmware installation (Version-up Procedure)
䎰 Confirm IP Adress of Printer Operation using MUTOH Maintenance

䎰 Engineer Assistant
䎳 Operation using operation panel
䎳 Set IP Address of PC
䎳 Execute Board Manager mode
䎰 Install Firmware
䎰 Confirm Firmware installation
End
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-10

7-11 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7.3.1 Parameter Backup

The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) installed on the main board assembly stores various parameters for the system
operation.
The available backup parameters are as follows.
. Panel setting parameters
. Mechanism adjustment parameters
. Main board-unique adjustment parameters
TIP
The main board-unique adjustment parameters cannot be erased or modified.
If the main board assembly is found to need replacement during maintenance operations, make sure to back
up the parameters. The backup data can be used to restore the original system status, omitting some
adjustment steps.
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant operation.
• Windows PC:
• CPU: Pentium 400MHz or higher, Installed memory: 128MB or more
• With one of the following installed: Windows98/Windows98SE/WindowsMe/Windows2000/
WindowsXP
• Equipped with network port (RJ-45) (10M/100M Ethernet interface)
• With dedicated network software (MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant) installed
• Network crossover cable (For hub connection, network straight cable)
7.3.3 Required Environment

Before starting work, set up the following environment.
(1) Installing MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant

1. Place the CD-ROM on the CD Drive tray of computer and explore the data from “My Computer“.
2. Find “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” folder in the CD-ROM, drag and drop it to the desktop.
(2) Creating Shortcut icon

Create shortcut icon on the desktop to launch the “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” easily.
1. Open the “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” folder.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-12

2. In the folder, right-click the “MUTOH

Maintenance Engineer Assistant.exe“, then click
[Send To] - [Desktop (create shortcut)].
3. An shortcut icon of “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” appears on the desktop.
(3) Confirming “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” launch

1. Double click the shortcut icon of “MUTOH
Maintenance Engineer Assistant” on the desktop
and confirm that the software is launched.
When the software is launched first, the UI

language will be Japanese.
7-13 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(4) Setting Language

You can select either Japanese or English for menu and message display.
If it is changed, the setting will be available by re-launch the software.
Follow the steps below to change the setting.
1. Select desired language from [Setup (S)] -

[Language (L)] of main screen.
2. In the Language Check window, click “OK“
The software quits automatically.
(5) Confirming IP Address of the Printer

1. Launch “Mutoh Maintenance Engineer
Assistant” from the shortcut on the desk top.
2. Click [Setup (S)] on the main screen.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-14

3. From [Setup (S)] menu, select [Option] and check if the displayed address matches the printer IP
address. The default printer IP address is “192.168.1.253”. Then, click [OK].
CAUTION
• For the IP address, use the default value as much as possible. If you want to use other
IP address, consult with the network administrator of the network to be connected.
• Do not make the IP address in three digits on purpose by entering “0” to 1 digit or 2 digits
strings. For example, the strings which should be entered is “10“, you don’ t have to enter
“010“. It may be a cause of communication error.
(6) PC IP Address Setting

To set up on Windows XP with the default IP address on the printer, follow the steps below.
1. From [Control Panel], open [Network Connections].
7-15 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and select [Properties].
3. Double-click [Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP)].
4. In [IP address], input

any value of
“192.168.1.1” to
“192.168.1.252” or
“092.168.1.254”.
Any numerical value between 1 and 252,

or 254.
5. Click [OK] to finish the setting.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-16

CAUTION
When the printer and PC are not directly connected with crossover cable but connected via
hub, the IP address needs to be different from that of devices on the network to be
connected. To connect via hub, consult with the network administrator.
(7) Connecting Printer to PC

1. Connect a ethernet cable to the network ports of
the printer and PC.
Network port
NOTE
• When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use a “crossover cable”. When
connecting the printer and PC via hub, use a “straight cable”.
• Use the printer and host PC on a one-to-one basis using crossover cable, not a part of network, as
possible.
7-17 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(8) Starting Board Manager Mode

1. When the printer is in the operation status or in
the menu display status, press [Power] key to
turn the printer off.
2. While holding down [<] key in the operation
panel, press [Power] key.
The LCD displays [Board Manager Mode]. If [<]
key is released, the display turns to “Waiting for
command”.
NOTE
If “waiting for command” is not displayed, follow the steps below.
If IP address that is not default is displayed on the board, releasing [Back] key will display
[IP192.168.xxx.xxx] (depending on the set address) on the LCD. In this case, display either of the
default IP (IP 192.168.1.253) or the set IP address using [+] and [-] key, and press [Enter] key.
Then, “waiting for command” will be displayed.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-18

7.3.4 Receiving Parameters

This section describes the procedure to record backup parameters to the PC from the existing MAIN board
assembly. To record backup parameters, follow the steps below.
NOTE
The extension of parameter file is “*.prm“
1. Click [Parameter Receive].
2. In the “Parameter receive check” window, click

[OK]. Installation will start.
* Click [Cancel] to return to the main window.
3. While receiving parameters, “Transferring”

window appears.
* Click [Cancel] to abort transferring.
4. In the “Receive completed” window, click [OK].

“Save of receive parameter file” window opens.
7-19 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5. In the “Save of receive parameter file” window,

confirm the location to save and click [Save] to
determine it.
Backup parameter is saved.
NOTE
In the “Save of receive parameter file” window, the file name to be saved is specified automatically
(you can change the file name). The specified name will be the serial number of the printer.If the
printer has no serial number, default file name will be displayed.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-20

7.3.5 Firmware Installation

This section describes the procedure to install the firmware.
The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) on the MAIN board assembly stores the programs (firmware) that control the
machine operations.
When performing the following maintenance works, always install the firmware.
• Replacing the MAIN board assembly

• Updating the firmware
CAUTION
Be careful not to install wrong version of firmware. Installing wrong firmware may disable
printer startup. In this case, MAIN board replacement is required.
NOTE
The extension of firmware file is “*.jfl“
(1) Setting DIP SW on MAIN board assembly

After replacement of MAIN board assembly, you have to set DIP SW position to disable overwrite-proof
function to install the firmware.
Follow the steps below to set the DIP SW position.
CAUTION
After replacement of MAIN board assembly, make sure DIP SW position is set so that
overwrite-proof function is enabled. Otherwise, when wrong firmware is installed, it may
disable printer startup. In this case, MAIN board replacement is required.
1. Replace MAIN board assembly.

"4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly" p.4-29
NOTE
Make sure that Paper guide R2 is attached after replacement of MAIN board assembly.
7-21 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2. Slide DIP SW 2 (SW3) to left (origin side).
-5&

%
10
2
No. Item
1 MAIN board
2 DIP SW
3 DIP SW 1
4 DIP SW 2
3. Turn the printer on with Board Manager Mode.

"(7) Connecting Printer to PC" p.7-17
4. Select default IP address “192.168.1.253” using
[+] and [-] key on the control panel, and press
[Enter] key
5. Install firmware referring "(2) Transferring Firmware" p.7-24 and "(3) Confirming Completion of
Installation to Printer" p.7-26.
6. Send parameters referring "7.3.6 Sending Parameters" p.7-28.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-22

NOTE
If there is no backup parameter is saved for some reason, such as parameter backup malfunction
because MAIN board is damaged, etc., install the latest firmware, initialize NVRAM, then set
parameters manually.
"6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu" p.6-6
"5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu" p.5-56
7. Turn the printer off.

8. Slide DIP SW 2 (SW3) to right (opposite of origin side).
NOTE
After installation, make sure to set DIP SW position to the right (opposite of origin side) as shown
below.
-5&

%
10
9. Attach covers.
7-23 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Transferring Firmware

The following explains the procedure to transfer firmware.
Follow the steps below.
NOTE
When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use “crossover cable”. When connecting
the printer and PC via hub, use “straight cable”.
1. Click [Firmware Install].
2. Select a file to be transferred from the folder

where the firmware is saved, and click [Open].
The “Select of installation file” window is
displayed.
3. In the “Firm installation check” window, click

[OK] to start installation.
4. “Transferring” window is displayed.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-24

5. If the “Transfer completed” window opens, click

[OK] to close the window.
CAUTION
• After the “Transfer completed” window is displayed, only the transfer of installation file
from “MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant” to the printer is completed, not program
installation to the printer. Do not turn off the printer until installation to the printer finishes.
• When “Transfer failed incompatible F/W” message is displayed while installation of proper
firmware, see the section below:
"(1) Setting DIP SW on MAIN board assembly" p.7-21
7-25 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(3) Confirming Completion of Installation to Printer

Firmware installation to printer continues even after the “Transfer completed” window is closed. Check
whether the program is properly installed from the operation panel.
1. When firmware transfer starts by “MUTOH

Maintenance Engineer Assistant”, the LCD
display on the printer’s operation control panel
changes to [Program receiving].
The Data LED flashes.
㧼㨞㨛㨓㨞㨍㨙‫ޓ‬㨞㨑㨏㨑㨕㨢㨑㨕㨚㨓
2. The LCD display changes as follows:
Erasing ×× (×× is numeric)

Copying ×× (×× is numeric)
Comparing ×× (×× is numeric)
㧱㨞㨍㨟㨕㨚㨓‫ޓ‬㧜㧝
CAUTION
While the LCD display is in the Erasing to Comparing status, the power key is disabled. In
this situation, never disconnect the plug of the printer. Doing so may disable printer startup,
which will require MAIN board replacement.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-26

3. If the LCD displays [transfer complete], the

buzzer sounds three times and only the Power
LED turns on among all LEDs.
㨠㨞㨍㨚㨟㨒㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㨏㨛㨙㨜㨘㨑㨠㨑
4. When [×××××× bytes recv (×× is numeric)] is

displayed, installation completes.
Turn off the printer and restart it. Then check the
version number displayed on the LCD.
㨤㨤㨤㨤㨤㨤‫ޓ‬㨎㨥㨠㨑㨟‫ޓ‬㨞㨑㨏㨢
NOTE
If an error occurs during installation, the buzzer sounds at intervals of 0.25 second, while the LCD
displays error message and all Hight, Low, Wave, Fine & S.Fine flash. In this case, follow the
troubleshooting instructions. To stop the buzzer, press any key except for the power key once.
Pressing the key once again will return the LCD display to “waiting for command” and only the
Power LED on.
7-27 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7.3.6 Sending Parameters
NOTE
Before sending parameters, perform the following work.
• Receiving parameters: "7.3.4 Receiving Parameters" p.7-19
• Firmware installation: "7.3.5 Firmware Installation" p.7-21
NOTE
The extension of parameter file is “*.prm“
1. Click [Parameter Send] on the main window.
2. When the “Select of send parameter file”

window opens, select the parameter file to be
transferred and click [Open].
3. In the “Parameter Send check” window, click

[OK] to start sending.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-28

4. When sending completes and the “Send

completed” window opens, click [OK].
NOTE
Almost as soon as the “Send completed” window is displayed, parameter writing to printer also
finishes. If writing to printer finishes successfully, the LCD displays the following:
Transfer complete
Buzzer sounds three times and only Power LED turns on. Then, when the LCD displays
16372 bytes recv
parameter writing completes.
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation

This section describes installation procedures of HEATER CONT board firmware.
NOTE
The extension of subcontroller file is “*.mfl“
CAUTION
Be careful not to transfer wrong version of firmware. Installing wrong firmware may disable
printer startup. In this case, MAIN board replacement is required.
1. Click [Sub Controller Install] on the main

window.
7-29 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

2. When the “Select of Install File” window opens,

select the file to be transferred and click [Open].
3. In the “Sub Controller Install check” window,

click [OK] to start sending.
4. While receiving parameters, “Transferring”

window appears.
5. When sending completes and the “Send

completed” window opens, click [OK].
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-30

7.3.8 Date & Time Setting

Sets date and time of the printer.
These data has been transferred from PC to printer. The setting can be confirmed in the “Time setting” of the
self-diagnosis function.
"5.10 Time Check" p.5-52
NOTE
The date and time information of PC is transferred directly. Check whether the information is correct
or not.
1. Click [Date & Time Install] on the main window.
2. When the “Date & time installation check”

window opens, click [OK].
Transferring will start.
3. When transferring completes and the “Install

completed” window opens, confirm that the
installed date is correct, and click [OK].
7-31 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7.4 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the PF speed reduction belt.
When you have removed and installed the PF speed reduction belt, such as for PF motor removal, always
adjust the PF speed reduction belt tension.
Using PF belt tension adjustment jig, adjust the PF encoder position and the PF belt tension.

The jigs and tools required for PF speed reduction belt tension adjustment are as follows.
• Tension gauge: for measuring Max. 50N (5,000gf)
TIP
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the PF speed reduction belt tension, follow the steps below.
1. Hook the tip of the tension gauge to the PF motor shaft.
No. Part name

1 PF bracket
2 PF motor shaft
3 PF motor fixing screws
2. Tighten the PF motor fixing screws. At that time, pull the PF motor shaft in the direction shown above
with a bigger arrow so that tension gauge indicates 40.0 ± 0.5N (4078.8gf ± 50.9gf).
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-32

CAUTION
During the operation, note the following points.

• The PF speed reduction belt tension specification is 40.0 ± 2.0N
• Since the specification includes the tension gauge error (1.5N), adjust to 40.0±0.5N in
actual adjustment, setting the error limit to half of one graduation (0.5N).
7.5 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the PF encoder assembly.
After replacing the PF encoder, adjust the PF encoder position.

To adjust PF encoder, follow the steps below.
1. Loosen the screws retaining the PF encoder assembly.

No. Part name
1 PF encoder assembly
2 PF encoder scale
2. Align the PF encoder assembly so that the corner covers the periphery of the PF encoder scale, then fix
the PF encoder assembly with screws.
No. Part name

1 PF encoder assembly
2 PF encoder scale
7-33 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

NOTE
Align the PF encoder so that the encoder scale slit periphery came very close to the corners of the PF
encoder.
PF encorder scale
come very close to
this point.
PF encorder scale
PF encorder
3. Attach the slit guide to the PF encoder assembly

No. Part name

1 Slit guide
2 Scale
3 PF scale assembly
4. Turn the scale around to check that the scale does not swing toward the speed reduction pulley from the
center of the encoder gap. If it swings, adjust the PF encoder assembly position again.
NOTE
There is no problem even if the scale hits the slit guide when turned around.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-34

7.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the CR belt.
When you have removed and installed the CR belt, adjust the CR belt tension.
1. Tighten the CR tension mounting shaft, and align the left side (viewed from the front of the printer) of
the graduation alignment pointer with the center line of graduations on the driven pulley base.
1 2 3 4
No. Part name
1 Driven pulley base
2 Driven pulley base graduations
3 Graduation alignment pointer
4 CR tension mounting shaft
2. After adjustment, apply screw-locking agent to the screw head of the CR tension mounting shaft not to
loosen it.
No. Part name

1 Driven pulley base graduations
1
2 CR tension mounting shaft screw
head
7-35 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

CAUTION
To align the graduation alignment pointer with the center line of driven pulley base, align the
left side (viewed from the front of the printer) of the pointer with the center line as shown
below.
Alignment pointer
L side R side
Align them like this. Alignment pointer
7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in horizontal direction.
When you have removed and installed the head assembly, such as for head assembly replacement, always
adjust the head slant and depth following the steps below.
NOTE
Before starting adjustment, remove the following parts.
• CR board cover: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61
• Cable cover R: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61
Adjust the horizontal height of the head alignment before adjusting the vertical alignment slant of
head alignment.
In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-36

1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment patterns in “Head Slant Check
Menu 1”.
"5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-29
2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
$
#
OO
% & '
A: Check the slant at this point.

C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
3. Move the head adjusting cam lever to adjust head slant.
No. Part name

1 Head adjusting cam
2 Head mounting plate
1
7-37 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7.8 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in vertical direction.
After operation such as head assembly replacement, adjust the head slant according to the steps below.
NOTE
• CR board cover: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61
• Cable cover R: "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61
Before aligning print head in vertical direction, perform the alignment in horizontal direction.
"7.7 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-36
In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
Side view
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment patterns in “Head Slant Check
Menu 2”.
"5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-38

2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
$ # $ # $ # $ #
%%9
$ # $ # $ # $ #
$ %9
% & '
A: Check the point to check the vertical slant angle.

C: OK
D: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the right.
E: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the left.
7-39 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. Loosen the vertical-slant adjusting tab screw and move the tab left and right to adjust the head vertical
angle.
No. Part name

1 Vertical-slant adjusting tab
2 Vertical-slant adjusting tab
screw
7.9 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the cutter holder height.

The following jigs and tools are required for cutter holder height adjustment.
• Cutter holder jig (VJ): JD-42804
TIP
NOTE
• Cable cover L "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-61
To make adjustment, follow the steps below.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-40

1. Loosen the screws (× 2) which fix cutter holder.
No. Part name

1 Cutter holder
2 Screws fixing cutter holder
2. Place the jig cutter holder (VJ) on the front of pressure arm, which is the third one from the origin.

No. Part name

1 Pressure arm
2 Platen
3 Jig set position
4 Cutter holder jig (VJ)
7-41 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. Place the cutter holder on the side face of the jig, set the cutter holder to the depression of the jig, and
hold the cutter holder down from above. Make sure that the part indicated by a circle in the figure holds
the cutter holder, fasten the tentatively-tightened screw fully and determine the cutter holder height.
No. Part name

1 Cutter holder
2 Cutter holder jig (VJ)

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-42

7.10 PG Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to check the carriage height (distance from the platen).

The following jigs and tools are required for carriage height (distance from the platen) check.
• PG height checking jig (VJ): JD-42806
TIP

Follow the steps below to adjust the platen height.
1. When moving the carriage, place the PG height checking jig onto the platen.
No. Part name

1 PG height checking jig

2 Platen
2. Move the carriage from the origin side while the head height adjusting lever is in “LOW”.
7-43 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

3. Check that the carriage can pass through a gap above the 1.1mm part of the PG height checking jig and
cannot pass through a gap above the 1.3mm part.
No. Part name

1 PG height checking jig
2 Head

OO OO
4. Reverse the direction of the jig and move the carriage from the opposite side of the origin.
5. If the result of step 3 is NG, readjust the PG height by moving two height adjust cams on both left and
right of carriage.
• To raise the head height: Rotate cam upward.
• To lower the head height: Rotate cam downward.
Left view 1 Right view
No. Part name

1 Height adjustment cam
2 Carriage
NOTE
The left and right cam changes the height separately. Make sure that follow the steps 3 to 4 and check
both left and right of the head height is proper by using PG height checking jig.
6. Apply adhesion bond to the height adjustment cam and fix the height.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-44

7. Return the carriage to the origin side.

8. Close the covers.
7.11 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the sensitivity of media sensor.
When you have removed and installed the sensors below or MAIN board assembly, always adjust the
sensitivity of media sensor
• P_EDGE sensor
• P_REAR sensor
NOTE
• When you adjust the sensor sensitivity, note the following;
• Any ambient light, such as sun light or room light, does not interfere with the sensor.
• Keep the media holding lever down so that the media is stable on the sensor during adjustment.
If media is not securely held, the sensor detection accuracy may be decreased.
• Use non-conductive screwdriver when operating the trimmer on the MAIN board assembly.
If a conductive screwdriver contacts with electronic component on the MAIN board or frame,
it may cause a short-circuit.
• Before adjusting sensor sensitivity, perform the following work.
• Install all covers except for media guide R2.
"4.2 Removal of Covers" p.4-5
7.11.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
(1) Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for P_EDGE sensor sensitivity adjustment.
• Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
7-45 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the P_EDGE sensor, follow the steps below.
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode.
NOTE
Start the self-diagnosis function before setting the test media. Otherwise, suction fan is not rotated
and you cannot get correct setting value.
TIP
"5.2.2 Starting Up" p.5-5
2. Select “Check: Test” from the self-diagnosis menu.

3. After confirming that the “check: Test” is displayed in the operation panel, set the test media on the media
base position and down the media hold lever.
Confirm that the suction fan starts rotating.
NOTE
The suction fan will not be rotated if the [Enter] key is pressed before setting the test media. Make
sure to press the [Enter] key after setting the test media.
4. Select “Test4: Sensor” from the inspection menu.

5. Select “Sen6: Edge AD” from the sensor menu.
7. Press the cutter cap with a finger and release the carriage lock.
8. Move the carriage to the center of the test media.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-46

9. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes “216 ± 10”.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
• Trimmer R361: Rough adjustment
• Trimmer R365: Fine adjustment
Main board
1 2
No. Part name

1 Trimmer R361
2 Trimmer R365
10. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes so that the value displayed in the operation panel becomes
“216 ± 10”.
11. Move the paper edge sensor to the non reflective tape area.
No. Part name

1 Metal measure
2 Non reflective tape
12. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is “80” or less.
7-47 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7.11.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment
(1) Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for P_REAR sensor adjustment.
• Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
(2) Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the P_REAR sensor, follow the steps below.
1. Sets the standard media.

2. Start up the self-diagnosis function.
TIP
"5.2.2 Starting Up" p.5-5
3. Select “Check: Test” from the self-diagnosis menu.

4. Select “Test: Sensor” from the inspection menu.
5. Select “Sen: Rear” from the sensor menu.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-48

7. Adjust the P_REAR sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes “216 ± 10”.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
• Trimmer R371: Rough adjustment
• Trimmer R373: Fine adjustment
Main board
1 2
No. Part name

1 Trimmer R371
2 Trimmer R373
8. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is “216 ± 10”.
9. Remove the standard media.
10. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is “80” or below.
7-49 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 7-50

8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 8- 2
8.2 Periodical Services ................................................................................. 8- 3
8.2.1 Periodical Replacement Parts........................................................ 8-3
8.2.2 Parts need to be checked or replaced ........................................... 8-4
8.3 Part Life Information............................................................................... 8- 5
8.4 Lubrication/Bonding............................................................................... 8- 7
8.5 Transportation of Printer........................................................................ 8- 8
8-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

8.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information about the periodical services, part life, lubrication/bonding, and transport.
WARNING
Before starting any maintenance work, always perform the following operations.
• Turn the printer. power OFF.
• Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
CAUTION
• Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance
work.
• When servicing the machinery inside with some covers removed, pay special attention
not to be injured by the driving mechanisms.
• Maintenance must be done by more than two person for the following work.
• When disassembling or reassembling the printer and the optional stand
• When packing the printer for transportation
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 8-2

8.2 Periodical Services

This section describes the periodical services required for this printer.
The periodical services ensures stable plotting quality of the printer.
Follow the explanations below to perform periodical inspections necessary.
TIP
• Operation manual
• Separate sheet “Exploded view” P.2-P.10
8.2.1 Periodical Replacement Parts

The parts shown below need to be replaced per year.
Table 8-1 Parts to be replaced
Maintenance part name Part to be replaced Reference

(Maintenance part no.)
VJ13 periodical replacement kit　 Damper assembly "4.6.1 Replacing

(DG-41152) Print Head" p.4-61
Maintenance assembly "4.7 Replacement of
Maintenance Section
Components" p.4-71
Cleaner head assembly "4.7.3 Replacing
Cleaner Head (Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-77
8-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

8.2.2 Parts need to be checked or replaced
Table 8-2 Periodical Inspection Part List
Part Timing Check point Action

Media guide L Several times per • Media dust Clean it.
Sub platen front surface year accumulation
• Foreign objects
• Damages NOTE
If ink deposits
are present,
remove them
with a dampened
cloth and wipe
the area with a
clean dry cloth.
Timing fence Several times per • Media dust Clean it.

(CR encoder detection year accumulation
slit plate) • Foreign objects If any damages are found,
• Damages replace the part.
"4.5.4 Replacing T
Fence" p.4-55
Rail on the CR guide Several times per Foreign objects Clean it.
frame year
P_REAR sensor front Several times per • Media dust Clean it.
surface year accumulation
• Foreign objects
Cleaner head Several times per • Ink deposits Clean it.
(Cleaning wiper) year • Damages
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 8-4

8.3 Part Life Information

This section shows how to check the life of the service parts.
To know the life of the service parts, check the maintenance counter from the counter display menu in the
maintenance mode.
TIP
"6.3.1 Counter Display Menu" p.6-4
Part life information of this printer is shown in the table below.
Table 8-3 List of Parts Life Expectancy

Part Life expectancy Warning How to Replacement References
display restore parts
Waste fluid tank Warning at Full Waste By Waste ink box
600,000 times of Ink Tank pressing (Replaced by
counting [Enter] users)
(equivalent to key while
-
600ml) replacing
the counter
to the new
one.
CR motor 4,700,000 passes Life Times CR motor At the first "4.5.1 CR
[CR Motor] initializa- warning: Motor
tion • CR motor Assembly"
• CR Driven p.4-51
pulley "4.5.5
(Check the ink Replacing CR
tube and the CR Driven Pulley
cable.) and CR belt"
At the next p.4-58
warning: "4.10.2
• CR cable Replacing Ink
besides above Tube" p.4-93
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-97
PF motor 20 Km Life Times PF motor Replace as "4.4.1
[PF Motor] initializa- necessary Replacing PF
tion Motor
Assembly"
p.4-44
Print head 6 × 108 (6 thousand Life Times Head unit Replace as "4.6.1
million) dots [Head] initializa- necessary Replacing
tion Print Head"
p.4-61
8-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 8-3 List of Parts Life Expectancy (Continued)

Part Life expectancy Warning How to Replacement References
display restore parts
Pump 60 million Life Times Pump Replace as "4.7.2
pulses(182,000 [Pump] initializa- necessary Replacing
rotations) tion Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-76
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 8-6

8.4 Lubrication/Bonding
This section covers the lubrication/bonding information.
After disassembling/assembling this printer, always perform necessary lubrication/bonding according to
Table 8-4"Lubricant List"(p.6).
CAUTION
Only use specified lubricants and greases. The use of unauthorized lubricants and greases
may damage the components and shorten the printer life.
Table 8-4 Lubricant List
Parts Item Manufacturer Type Exploded

view
Cover section Roll receiver Apply to the top Dow Corning MOLYKOTE
(L, R) cover contacting Toray Co.,Ltd. (R)EM-60L
surface. GREASE
Front cover Apply to the top Dow Corning MOLYKOTE
support pin L cover contacting Toray Co.,Ltd. (R)EM-60L
surface. GREASE
CR section Cursor guide Apply to the front Mitsubishi Super multi-
surface. dia tetrat
No.32
Pressure Apply to the Dow Corning MOLYKOTE
shaft bearing peripheral surface. Toray Co.,Ltd. (R)EM-60L
GREASE
Pressure Apply to the Dow Corning MOLYKOTE
shaft stopper pressure lever Toray Co.,Ltd. (R)EM-60L
springs. GREASE
Head section Head cable Affix to each cable Not specified 10mm- width
(for locating and double faced
holding) tape
Cable guide CR cable Affix to each cable Not specified 10mm-width
section (for locating) double faced
tape
Tube guide Affix to the tube Not specified 10mm-width
guide (for double faced
locating) tape
Others Screw Apply to the area Three Bond 1401 -
screw-locking Co., Ltd.
agent is applied.
8-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

8.5 Transportation of Printer

This section describes how to transport the printer.
Before transporting the printer, you must package it in the same manner as it was delivered using protective
materials and packaging materials so that the printer will not be subject to excessive impact and vibrations
during the transportation.
Follow the steps below to package the printer.
(1) Task Before Transportation

1. Turn the printer power ON.
2. Verify that the printer is in normal state.
3. Remove all ink cartridges.
4. Turn OFF the printer.
5. The operation panel shows “Transport Mode” and the printer begins ink discharging operation.
6. It takes about two minutes for discharging ink.
7. Check that ink discharging is complete and the Power lamp is off.
8. Remove the scroller.
9. Remove all cables including the power cable.
10. Fit the printer with protective materials.
TIP
Operation manual
11. If the optional stand is used, separate the printer from the stand.
TIP
Operation manual
12. Package the printer.
(2) Task After Transportation

1. Unpack, assemble, and install the printer.
2. Make the printer ready for operation.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 8-8

9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 9- 2
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages ................................................. 9- 2
9.2.1 Operation Status ............................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message ...................................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot ................................................................ 9-9
9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission................................... 9-25
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages ......................................... 9- 30
9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems............................................................ 9-30
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems.................................................................. 9-39
9.3.3 Printing Problems......................................................................... 9-41
9.3.4 Noise Problems............................................................................ 9-59
9.3.5 Online Function Problems............................................................ 9-62
9.3.6 Other Problems............................................................................ 9-65
9.3.7 Troubleshooting For A Dedicated Network Software................... 9-67
9-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

9.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on possible causes of machine errors/damage and recovery actions.
If the machine is malfunctioning and an error message is displayed on the operation panel, refer to "9.2
Troubleshooting with Error Messages" p.9-2. If the machine is malfunctioning but no error messages are
displayed, refer to "9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages" p.9-30.
If cause of errors/damage and recovery actions are not found in this chapter, or the machine cannot restore to
normal status, please contact the distributor your purchased the product from or our customer support center.
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages

This section describes the messages displayed in normal operation and upon an error occurrence as well as
how to correct the error.
The available messages are as follows.
Table 9-1 Error Message Type
Priority Message type Contents Reference

1 Operation status Displayed when the machine is operating normally. "9.2.1
Operation
Status" p.9-3
2 Error with Displayed when an abnormal condition occurs "9.2.2
message during normal operation. Errors with
Message" p.9-5
3 Data error Displayed when a data communication error occurs "9.2.3
between PC and the machine. Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-9
4 Command error Displayed when an abnormal condition occurs "9.2.3
during analysis of PC commands. Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-9
5 Error requiring Displayed when a serious error critical to the "9.2.3
reboot machine operation occurs. Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-9
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-2

9.2.1 Operation Status

This section describes the message contents, check items, and recovery actions for normal operation.
These messages appear on LCD, and the machine stops its operation at the same time.
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages
No. Message Event/ Check item Action Reference
symptom
1 Cover Open Front cover is Is cover sensor Tighten cover sensor "4.8.3
open. assembly loose? assembly screws. Replacing
Cover Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-85
2 Lever Up Media holding 1. Is cover sensor Correctly connect cover "4.3.3
lever is turned assembly cable sensor assembly cables Replacing
backward. connected securely? to main board assembly Main Board
connector J117. Assembly"
p.4-29
2. Does pressure lever Lubricate pressure cam. "8.4
move smoothly? Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-7
3. Is lever sensor Adjust lever sensor "4.5.3
assembly fitted assembly position. Replacing
correctly? Lever
Sensor" p.4-
54
4. Is sensor of lever Clean sensor face using "4.5.3
sensor assembly a swab. Replacing
contaminated? Lever
Sensor" p.4-
54
5. Is lever sensor Correctly connect lever "4.5.3
cable connected sensor assembly cables Replacing
securely? to main board assembly Lever
connector J132. Sensor" p.4-
54
6. Check the cover Replace cover sensor "4.8.3
sensor from "Sen assembly. Replacing
4:Cover" of self- Cover Sensor
diagnosis function. Assembly"
p.4-85
7. Check the lever Replace lever sensor "4.5.4
sensor from "Sen assembly. Replacing T
5:Lever" of self- Fence" p.4-55
diagnosis function.
9-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages (Continued)
symptom
2 Lever Up Media holding 8. Main board Replace main board "4.3.3
lever is turned assembly may be assembly. Replacing
backward. damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
3 Media End Displayed 1. Is P_EDGE sensor Securely connect it to "4.10.1
when media is assembly cable at CR board assembly Replacing CR
not set the head section connector J211. Board
connected Assembly"
correctly? p.4-91
2. Is P_REAR sensor Securely connect it to "4.3.3
assembly under main board assembly Replacing
media guide R connector J114. Main Board
connected Assembly"
correctly? p.4-29
3. Check sensor Adjust with main board "7.11.1
sensitivity from assembly volume P_EDGE
"Sen 6:EdgeAD" of (R117, R119). Sensor
self-diagnosis Replace P_EDGE Sensitivity
function. sensor assembly. Adjustment"
p.7-45
4. CR board assembly Replace CR board "4.10.1
may be damaged. assembly. Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
5. Check presence of When "Media End" is "4.9.2
media from "Sen displayed even if media Replacing
7:Rear" of self- is set, replace P_REAR P_REAR
diagnosis function. sensor assembly. Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-90
6. CR cable may be Replace CR cable. "4.10.3
broken. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-97
7. Main board Replace main board "4.3.3
assembly may be assembly. Replacing
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-4

9.2.2 Errors with Message

This section describes the contents of errors with messages as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These messages are displayed when an abnormal condition occurs while the machine is running.
Upon an occurrence of an error with message, the machine stops its operation at the same time.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes. After that, the machine will restart its operation.
Table 9-3 Events and Check Items for Errors with Messages
symptom
1 Undefined Media 1. Is P_EDGE sensor Securely connect it to "4.10.1
Media detection failed assembly cable at CR board assembly Replacing CR
head connected connector J211. Board
correctly? Assembly"
p.4-91
2. Is P_REAR sensor Securely connect it to "4.3.3
under media guide main board assembly Replacing
R connected connector J130, J131. Main Board
p.4-29
3. Check sensor • Adjust with main "7.11.1
sensitivity from board assembly P_EDGE
"Sen 6:EdgeAD" of volume (R361, Sensor
self-diagnosis R365). Sensitivity
function. • Replace P_EDGE Adjustment"
sensor assembly. p.7-45
4. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect following "4.3.3

obliquely? connectors. Replacing
• Main board Main Board
assembly: J110 - Assembly"
J114 p.4-29
• CR board: J201 - "4.10.1
J205 Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
5. CR cable may be Replace CR cable. "4.10.3
broken. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-97
6. CR board assembly Replace CR board "4.10.1
may be damaged. assembly. Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
9-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 9-3 Events and Check Items for Errors with Messages (Continued)
symptom
1 Undefined Media 7. Check presence of When "Media End" is "4.9.2
Media detection failed media from "Sen displayed even if media Replacing
7:Rear" of self- is set, replace P_REAR P_REAR
diagnosis function. sensor. Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-90
8. Main board Replace main board "4.3.3
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
2 Media Slant Media is 1. Set media again and If this error is caused by -
running check reappearance. user's inappropriate
obliquely. media setting, instruct
correct media setting
procedure.
2. Is suction fan works - Check connection of "4.9.1
normally when following main board Replacing
checked through assembly connectors. Suction Fan
“Fan1: Vacum Fan” • Suction fan 1 cable: Assembly"
of "Test6: Fan" of J128 p.4-89
self-diagnosis • Suction fan 2 cable:
function? J127
• Suction fan L cable:
J126
• Replace suction fan
assembly.
• Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate
normally.
3. Is shielding material Remount it at specified -
secured at specified position.
position?
4. Check pressure Apply grease (G501) to "8.4
lever operation. pressure cam and make Lubrication/
adjustment. Bonding"
p.8-7
5. Is P_EDGE sensor Securely connect it to "4.10.1
assembly cable at CR board assembly Replacing CR
head connected connector J211. Board
p.4-91
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-6

symptom
2 Media Slant Media is 6. Check sensor • Adjust with main "7.11.1
running sensitivity from board assembly P_EDGE
obliquely. "Sen 6:EdgeAD" of volume (R361, Sensor
self-diagnosis R365). Sensitivity
function. • Replace P_EDGE Adjustment"
sensor assembly. p.7-45
3 [KCMY] Ink is running 1. Check contact of the Reconnect following "4.3.3

Ink Near End short. Printing ink sensor connectors. Replacing
[KCMY] is possible. assembly. MAIN board: J43 Main Board
Ink End Ink has run out. HEATER JUNCTION Assembly"
Any printing board: p.4-29
operation stops • Connector J5(K)
immediately. • Connector J6(C)
• Connector J7(M)
• Connector J8(Y)
2. For the ink color • If ink color display "4.8.1
that is displayed as changes after Replacing
"Ink Near End" or replacing Ink Holder (I/
"Ink End", switch connector: H)
ink sensor assembly Ink sensor assembly Assembly"
connector with that is damaged. p.4-79
of normally Replace ink sensor
displayed ink color. assembly.
• If ink color display
does not change "4.3.3
after replacing Replacing
connector: Main Board
JUNCTION board Assembly"
assembly may be p.4-29
damaged.Replace
JUNCTION board
assembly.
4 [KCMY] Cartridge is not 1. Turn machine OFF. If message appears: -
No Cartridge installed. Turn it ON again Refer to action in check
and check if the item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Check contact of Reconnect following "4.3.3
ink NOT sensor connectors. Replacing
assembly MAIN board: J43 Main Board
connector. HEATER JUNCTION Assembly"
board: p.4-29
• Connector J5(K)
• Connector J6(C)
• Connector J7(M)
• Connector J8(Y)
9-7 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

symptom
4 [KCMY] Cartridge is not 3. For the ink color If ink color displayed as "4.8.1
No Cartridge installed. that is displayed as "No ink" changes after Replacing
"Little ink" or "No replacing connector: Ink Holder (I/
ink", switch ink Ink sensor assembly is H)
NOT sensor damaged. Replace ink Assembly"
assembly connector sensor assembly. p.4-79
with that of
If ink color displayed as "4.3.3
normally displayed
"No ink" does not Replacing
ink color.
change after replacing Main Board
connector: Assembly"
JUNCTION board p.4-29
assembly may be
damaged.Replace
JUNCTION board
assembly.
5 [KCMY]Not Specified ink 1. Check if the same If the message appears: -
Original cartridge is not message appear if Refer to the action in
installed. turning machine check item No. 2.
OFF and turn it ON
again.
2. Check if specified Replace ink cartridge Operation
ink cartridge is with specified one. Manual
used.
3. Check if a new ink If detection does not "4.8.1
cartridge is detected operate normally, Replacing
normally while replace following parts. Ink Holder (I/
pushing in / pulling • Ink sensor assembly H)
out the cartridge. • Main board assembly Assembly"
p.4-79
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
4. Check contact of - Reconnect following "4.3.3

ink ID sensor main board assembly Replacing
assembly connectors. Main Board
connector. MAIN board: J43 Assembly"
HEATER JUNCTION p.4-29
board:
• Connector J5(K)
• Connector J6(C)
• Connector J7(M)
• Connector J8(Y)
If no change occurs,
proceed to step (5).
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-8

symptom
6 Warning: Waste fluid 1. Turn machine OFF. If the message appears: -
Waste fluid tank is almost Turn it ON again Refer to the action in
box full full. and check if the check item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Waste ink in waste Replace waste fluid box. Operation
fluid box reaches Manual
full level.
7 Warning: Ink Ink tube life 1. Turn machine OFF. If the message appears: -
tube life has almost Turn it ON again Refer to the action in
expired. and check if the check item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Use of ink tube has Replace ink tube. "4.10.2
exceeded specified Replacing
level. Ink Tube"
p.4-93
NOTE
• The square bracket pair in an error message contains the applicable ink color.
• If no ink and no cartridge occur at the same time, no cartridge message has priority to be displayed.
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot

This section describes the contents of reboot-requiring errors as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These errors are issued when any of the following critical problems occurs.
• Obstacle that prevents the machine's operation
• Damage of electric circuits (boards, motors, sensors)
• Abnormal operation of control programs
When any of the above conditions occurs, the machine follows the steps shown below before stopping its
operation.
1. Turn OFF the driving system power automatically.
2. Flash all lamps in the operation panel and generate intermittent audible alarm.
3. Display the applicable error message on the LCD.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes and restarting the machine.
9-9 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(1) CPU system serious error

Table 9-4 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors
symptom
1 E 016 error Interruption 1. Check AC power Contact our customer Operation
Interrupt exception supply and printer support center. Manual
[00] error: surrounding
Abnormal equipment.
condition in
2. Check reappearance
interruption
by turning ON/OFF
process.
the machine power
several times. Make
sure to perform this
check repeatedly
even if no problems
seem to be present.
(Make the same
condition as user's.)
2 E 016 error Command
TLB Modif border
[01] exception/TLB
exception (load
or command
fetch) error:
Abnormal
condition in
command
border.
Or TLB
exception in
data load or
command
fetch.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-10

Table 9-4 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors (Continued)
symptom
3 E 016 error Data border 3. Check serial • Contact our "4.3.3
TLB-L/I exception/TLB number of the customer support Replacing
[02] exception printer. center. Main Board
4. Main board • Replace main board Assembly"
assembly. p.4-29
assembly may be
defective.
4 E 016 error Data border
TLB-S exception/TLB
[03] exception
(store) error:
Abnormal
condition in
data border.
Or TLB
exception in
data storing.
5 E 016 error Address
AddErr-L/I exception error
[04] (load or
command
fetch):
Address error
in command
load or fetch.
6 E 016 error Address
AddErr-S exception error
[05] (store):
Address error
in saving
process.
7 E 016 error Pass exception 1. Check serial • Contact our "4.3.3
BusErr-I error number of the customer support Replacing
[06] (command printer. center. Main Board
fetch): • Replace main board Assembly"
2. Main board
Address error assembly. p.4-29
assembly may be
in command
defective.
loading or
storing
8 E 016 error Bus exception 1. Check serial • Contact our "4.3.3
BusErr-L error (load or number of the customer support Replacing
[07] store): printer. center. Main Board
Bus error in Assembly"
2. Main board
command • Replace main board p.4-29
assembly may be
loading or assembly.
defective.
storing
9-11 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

symptom
9 E 016 error System call 1. Check serial • Contact our "4.3.3
SystemCall exception number of the customer support Replacing
[08] error: printer. center. Main Board
Abnormal Assembly"
2. Main board
condition in • Replace main board p.4-29
assembly may be
system call assembly.
defective.
10 E 016 error Break point

BreakPoint exception
[09] error:
Abnormal
condition in
break point
11 E 016 error Reserved
Reserverd command
[10] exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
reserved
command
12 E 016 error Coprocessor
Copro disabled
[11] exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
coprocessor
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-12

symptom
13 E 016 error Arithmetic 1. Check AC power • Contact our
Overflow overflow supply and printer customer support
[12] exception surrounding center.
error: equipment.
Overflow
2. Check reappearance
occurs
by turning ON/OFF
the machine power
several times. Make
sure to perform this
check repeatedly
even if no problems
seem to be present.
(Make the same
condition as user's.)
3. Check serial • Contact our
number of the customer support
printer. center.
4. Main board • Replace main board
assembly may be assembly.
defective.
14 E 016 error Trap exception "4.3.3
Trap error: Replacing
[13] Trap occurs Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
15 E 016 error Floating point
Floating exception
[15] error:
Abnormal
condition in
floating point
process
16 E 016 error Watchdog
WatchDog time-out
[32] exception
error:
Time-out in
watchdog
17 E 016 error Abort error:
Abort Err Process
[33] aborted
9-13 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

NOTE
For the PC settings, refer to your PC's operation manual.
(2) Mechanical Serious Errors

Table 9-5 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors
symptom
1 E 065 error Abnormal 1. Check error history - "5.5.7
PF motor condition in PF from "Test7: History
motor (X-axis) Record." of self- Menu" p.5-18
during printer diagnosis function.
operation.
2. Set the number of
Displayed if "4.3.3
endurance running
the difference Replacing
cycles to 50 or more
between motor Main Board
from “Check10:
command Assembly"
Endurance” of
value and p.4-29
"Life2: PF Motor"
feedback from Check connection of
of self-diagnosis
encoder is following main board
function, and check
large. assembly connectors.
if "X motor error"
• PF motor cable
occurs.
assembly
3. Check "Encoder: connector: J20
PF" from "Test5: • PF_ENC assembly
Encoder" of self- connector: J12
diagnosis function.
• If NG, check
4. PF motor assembly connection of main "4.4.1
may be defective. board assembly Replacing PF
connector: J12. Motor
5. Main board • Replace PF motor Assembly"
assembly may be assembly. p.4-44
defective.
• Replace main board "4.3.3
assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-14

Table 9-5 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors (Continued)
symptom
CR motor condition in from "Test7: History
CR motor (Y- Record" of self- Menu" p.5-18
axis) during diagnosis function.
printer • Clean and lubricate "8.4
2. Move carriage in
operation. CR rail roller guide. Lubrication/
both directions
Displayed if Bonding"
while the printer is • Check connection
the difference of following p.8-7
turned off, and
between motor connectors.
check if there is any
command
position where Main board:
value and "4.3.3
carriage does not • CR motor assembly
feedback from Replacing
move smoothly. connector: J21
encoder is Main Board
large. 3. Set the number of • CR cable connector: Assembly"
endurance running J9 - J11 p.4-29
cycles to 50 or more CR board:
from “Check10: • CR cable connector:
Endurance” of J201 - J205
"Life1: CR motor"
of self-diagnosis
function, and check
if "Y motor error"
occurs.
9-15 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

symptom
PF encoder condition in from "Test7: History
media feed Record" of Menu" p.5-18
amount (X- “Check2: Test” of
axis) during self-diagnosis
printer function. Check connection of "4.3.3
operation. following main board Replacing
Displayed if assembly connectors. Main Board
endurance running
there is no • PF motor cable Assembly"
feedback from assembly p.4-29
from “Check10:
encoder. connector: J20
Endurance” of
"Life2: PF Motor" • PF_ENC assembly
of self-diagnosis connector: J12
function, and check • If NG, check
if "X motor error" connection of main
occurs. board assembly
connector: J12.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Test5:
Encoder" of • Replace PF motor "4.4.1
“Check2: Test” of assembly. Replacing PF
self-diagnosis Motor
function. • Replace main board Assembly"
assembly. p.4-44
4. PF motor assembly
may be defective. "4.3.3
5. Main board Replacing
assembly may be Main Board
defective. Assembly"
p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-16

symptom
CR encoder condition in from of “Check2: History
head travel Test” - "Test7: Menu" p.5-18
distance (Y- Record" -
axis) during “Record2: Error” of • Clean and lubricate "8.4
printer self-diagnosis CR rail roller guide. Lubrication/
operation. function. • Check connection Bonding"
Displayed if of following p.8-7
2. Move carriage in
there is no connectors.
both directions
feedback from
while the printer is Main board:
encoder. "4.3.3
turned off, and • CR motor assembly Replacing
check if there is any connector: J21 Main Board
position where • CR cable connector: Assembly"
carriage does not J9 - J11 p.4-29
move smoothly.
CR board:
3. Set the number of • CR cable connector:
endurance running J201 - J205
from “Check10:
Endurance” of
"Life1: CR motor"
of self-diagnosis
function, and check
if "Y motor error"
occurs.
9-17 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

symptom
5 E069 error Time-out 1. Check error history - "5.5.7
PF time-out condition in from “Check2: History
media feed Test” - "Test7: Menu" p.5-18
amount (X- Record" -
axis) during “Record2: Error” of
printer self-diagnosis Check connection of "4.3.3
operation. function. following main board Replacing
pressure roller • PF motor cable Assembly"
endurance running
does not reach assembly p.4-29
the defined connector: J20
from “Check10:
position. • PF_ENC assembly
Endurance” of
"Life2: PF Motor" connector: J12
of self-diagnosis • If NG, check
function, and check connection of main
if "X motor error" board assembly
occurs. connector: J12.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Test5: • Replace PF motor
Encoder" of assembly. "4.4.1
“Check2: Test” of Replacing PF
self-diagnosis • Replace main board Motor
function. assembly. Assembly"
p.4-44
4. PF motor assembly
may be defective. "4.3.3
Replacing
5. Main board Main Board
assembly may be Assembly"
defective. p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-18

symptom
6 E 070 error Time-out 1. Check error history - "5.5.7
CR time-out condition in from “Check2: History
head travel Test” - "Test7: Menu" p.5-18
distance (Y- Record" -
axis) during “Record2: Error” of
printer self-diagnosis Check connection of "4.3.3
operation. function. following main board Replacing
carriage does • PF motor cable Assembly"
endurance running
not reach the assembly p.4-29
defined connector: J20
from “Check10:
position. • PF_ENC assembly
Endurance” of
"Life2: PF Motor" connector: J12
of self-diagnosis • If NG, check
function, and check connection of main
if "X motor error" board assembly
occurs. connector: J12.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Test5: • Replace PF motor
Encoder" of assembly. "4.4.1
“Check2: Test” of Replacing PF
self-diagnosis • Replace main board Motor
function. assembly. Assembly"
p.4-44
4. Check if Main
Power Board "4.3.3
normally supplies Replacing
DC24V. Main Board
5. PF motor assembly Assembly"
may be defective. p.4-29
6. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
9-19 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

symptom
7 E071 error Overload 7. Check if T fence is • If grease or dust "4.5.4
PF overcurrent condition in PF contaminated or collect: Wipe fence Replacing T
motor (X-axis) worn out. with a dry cloth. Fence" p.4-55
during printer • If ink deposit
operation. presents: Wipe it off
8 E 072 error Overload with cloth
CR overcurrent condition in dampened with
CR motor (Y- neutral detergent.
9 E074 error "4.5.4
axis) during • If contamination or Replacing T
CR2
printer deposit is too heavy: Fence" p.4-55
overcurrent
operation. Replace T fence.
8. Check "CR a) If NG:
Encoder" from Check following cable
"Test5: Encoder" of connection. "4.5.4
“Check2: Test” of • CR board assembly Replacing T
self-diagnosis connector J207 Fence" p.4-55
function. b) Replace following "4.5.1 CR
parts. Motor
• T fence Assembly"
• CR motor assembly p.4-51
• CR board assembly "4.10.1
• CR cable Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
• Replace main board p.4-91
assembly. "4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
9. Main board p.4-97
assembly may be "4.3.3
damaged. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-20

symptom
10 E075Err Head Abnormal 1. Check connection Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
Cable condition in of head cable Replacing
head cable or connectors on CR Print Head"
head board assembly side p.4-61
thermistor. and head side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable Replacing CR
inserted obliquely? Board
Assembly"
• Is it locked p.4-91
securely?
2. Is head cable Replace head cable. "4.6.1
broken? Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
3. Head thermistor Replace Print head "4.6.1
may be faulty. assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
11 E 076 error Abnormal Disconnection of 1. Reconnect "4.4.4
pre-heater condition in connector, wrong connector of Replacing
system pre-heater wiring, or heater thermistor and Heater and
system malfunction of heater. Thermistor
(thermistor, thermistor and heater Assembly"
2. Check connection
heater). may be occurred. p.4-49
of board section.
"4.3
3. Replace heater. Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-23
12 E077Err Platen Abnormal Disconnection of 1. Reconnect "4.4.4
Heat condition in connector, wrong connector of Replacing
platen heater wiring, or heater thermistor and Heater and
2. Check connection
of board section.
"4.3
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-23
9-21 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

symptom
13 E078Err After Abnormal Disconnection of 1. Reconnect "4.4.4
Heat condition in connector, wrong connector of Replacing
after-heater wiring, or heater thermistor and Heater and
2. Check connection
of board section.
"4.3
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-23
14 E079Err Abnormal • Communication 1. Check connection "4.3

Commu. condition in cable may be faulty. between main board Replacement
serial commu- • F/W on controller to controller board. of Board Base
nication board may be faulty. 2. Check connection Section
between main Components
• Main board between junction
board to " p.4-23
assembly may be board to controller
controller "5.5.2
damaged. board.
board during Version
printing • Controller board 3. Check firmware Menu" p.5-13
operation. assembly may be version and install "7.3.5
faulty. the latest version. Firmware
• Power board Installation"
4. Replace controller p.7-21
assembly may be board or main
damaged. "4.3.6
board. Replacing
5. Replace power Power Board
board assembly. Assembly"
p.4-35
15 E080Err Abnormal
Junction condition in
serial commu-
nication
between
junction board
to controller
board during
printing
operation.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-22

symptom
16 E 081 error CR_HP 1. Check CR_HP • Check connection "5.5.4
CR origin detection is not sensor from "Sen1: of CR_HP sensor Sensor
possible. CR Origin" of self- cable assembly Menu" p.5-15
diagnosis function. connector.
2. CR_HP sensor may • Replace CR_HP "4.5.2
be damaged. sensor. Replacing CR
Origin Point
Sensor" p.4-
52
3. Main board • Replace main board "4.3.3
damaged. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
17 E 082 error Abnormal • Wiper sensor 1. Check connection "4.7.3
wiper sensor condition in assembly may be of wiper sensor Replacing
wiper sensor. faulty. connector. Cleaner Head
• Maintenance (Cleaning
2. Replace wiper
assembly may be Wiper)" p.4-
sensor.
damaged. 77
3. Replace wiper "4.3
• Main board Replacement
origin cable
assembly may be of Board Base
assembly.
faulty. Section
4. Replace pump cap Components
assembly. " p.4-23
5. Replace main board
assembly.
18 E084Err Head Installed head Installed head is not Replace head. "4.6.1
Dist. is incorrect. manufactured by other Replacing
vendor. Print Head"
p.4-61
19 E 085 error Abnormal Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3
head overheat condition in may be damaged. assembly. Replacement
head driver. of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-23
20 E 086 error Abnormal Head or head cable may 1. Check connection "4.6
head OVP condition in be damaged. of head cable. Replacement
head driver. of Head
2. Replace head.
Section
Components
" p.4-61
9-23 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

symptom
21 E087Err H Abnormal Temperature 1. Replace thermistor. "4.4.4
Trans Th condition in abnormality of head Replacing
2. Replace main
head transistor. transistor on main board Heater and
board.
or sensor abnormality of Thermistor
thermistor may be Assembly"
occurred. p.4-49
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-23
22 E090Err • The input voltage of 1. Supply power to the "4.3.4
Heater Volt. AC inlet may be too AC inlet with Replacing
high. proper voltage. HEATER
• HEATER CONT CONT board
2. Replace HEATER
board assembly may assembly"
CONT board
be damaged. p.4-30
assembly.
23 E 097 error Abnormal Replace main board "4.3.3
NVRAM condition in assembly. Replacing
NVRAM. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-24

9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission

This section describes the error messages displayed when sending backup parameters and firmware using
dedicated online software, as well as their recovery actions.
Table 9-6 Error Messages During File Transmission

symptom
1 Transfer failed Firmware data Check if transferred After confirming it, "7.3.5
Data format format is firmware is an install firmware again. Firmware
error inappropriate. appropriate file. Installation"
p.7-21
2 Transfer failed Cancel button - Transfer firmware
Aborted by the on PC has been again.
HOST pressed.
3 Transfer failed Communication Check connection After resolving
Data timeout time-out between printer and PC. problem, transfer
occurred. firmware again.
4 Transfer failed File checksum - 1. Transfer firmware
Check-sum error. again.
error
2. If error message is
still displayed,
check if transferred
firmware is an
appropriate file.
5 Transfer failed Received Check if program file is After confirming it,
Wrong size wrong size appropriate. transfer data again.
xxxxxxxx data.
6 Transfer failed Incompatible Check if program file is After confirming it, "7.3.5
Incompatible firmware. appropriate. install firmware again. Firmware
F/W Installation"
p.7-21
7 Transfer failed ROM erase Board may be defective. Replace main board. "4.3.3
Flash erase error. Replacing
error Main Board
Assembly"
8 Transfer failed ROM writing
p.4-29
Flash write error.
error
9 Transfer failed ROM
Flash compare comparing
error error.
10 Transfer failed FROM written Normally not detected.
Unknown in unknown FROM may be
Flash size method is defective.
detected.
9-25 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 9-6 Error Messages During File Transmission (Continued)

symptom
11 Internal Error No memory Normally not occurred. • Replace SODIMM. "4.3.3
Memory area is SODIMM may be • Replace main Replacing
Exhausted available. defective. board. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
12 Transfer failed “Block reply Check connection • Reconnect control "4.3.4
Block replay timeout” between control board board and main Replacing
timeout occurred and main board. board. HEATER
during system • Replace the cable CONT board
code transfer. connecting control assembly"
board and main p.4-30
13 Transfer failed Invalid value is
board. "4.3.3
Block replay received during
Replacing
error xx system code • Replace control Main Board
transfer. board. Assembly"
14 Transfer failed “Final reply • Replace main p.4-29
Final reply timeout“ board.
timeout occurred
during system
code transfer.
15 Transfer failed Invalid value is
Final reply received during
error xx final system
code transfer.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-26


symptom
16 Boot Transfer Opening • Check connection • Reconnect control "4.3.4
failed sequence of between control board and main Replacing
Opening seq. boot code board and main board. Otherwise, HEATER
failed transfer failed. board. replace the cable CONT board
• Check if the green connecting control assembly"
LED on control board and main p.4-30
board is lit. board. "4.3.3
• If the green LED on Replacing
• Check if the red Main Board
LED on control control board is off
after the power is Assembly"
board is blinking. p.4-29
turned on, replace
the control board. "7.3
Working with
• If the red LED is MUTOH
blinking and there is Maintenance
no problem at Engineer
connection between Assistant"
control board and p.7-8
main board, try to "7.4
reinstall firmware. Working with
• If the red LED is MUTOH
off, perform the Service
following Assistance"
procedures. p.3-30
1. Turn off the power,
then switch the DIP
switch as follows:
1: ON
2: ON
3: ON
4: OFF
2. Start the board
manager mode.
3. Reinstall firmware.
4. Turn off the power,
then switch the DIP
switch as follows:
1: ON
2: OFF
3: ON
4: OFF
5. Turn on the power,
then check if the red
LED is blinking.
9-27 AP-74109 Rev 1.1


symptom
17 Boot Transfer AA did not Check connection • Reconnect control "4.3.4
failed replied to Step between control board board and main Replacing
55-AA 55 of boot code and main board. board. HEATER
Timeout transfer. • Replace the cable CONT board
connecting control assembly"
18 Boot Transfer xx replied to
board and main p.4-30
failed Step 55 of boot
board. "4.3.3
55-AA reply code transfer.
Replacing
error xx • Replace control Main Board
19 Boot Transfer An error (xx) board. Assembly"
failed replied to • Replace main p.4-29
End code xx transfer end of board.
boot code.
20 Boot Transfer Transfer
failed sequence echo
Echo timeout of boot code
did not reply.
21 Boot Transfer Invalid transfer
failed sequence echo
Echo error xx of boot code
did not reply.
22 Internal error Failed in Normally not occurred. Replace main board. "4.3.3
Parameter save writing FROM may be Replacing
error parameter. defective. Main Board
Assembly"
23 Transfer failed Invalid year SODIMM or main • Replace SODIMM.
p.4-29
Wrong year data (xxxx) board may be defective. • Replace main
xxxx received. board.
24 Transfer failed Invalid month
Wrong month data (xx)
xx received.
25 Transfer failed Invalid day
Wrong date data (xx)
xx received.
26 Transfer failed Invalid hour
Wrong hour data (xx)
xx received.
27 Transfer failed Invalid minute
Wrong min data (xx)
xx received.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-28


symptom
28 Transfer not Transfer is not Check if LED display Press any button on "7.3
ready available. on operation panel is in operation panel to make Working with
waiting status of board the panel display MUTOH
manager mode. waiting state. Then, Maintenance
reinstall the software. Engineer
Assistant"
p.7-8
"7.4
Working with
MUTOH
Service
Assistance"
p.3-30
9-29 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages

This section describes the symptoms of errors without an error message as well as the check items and
recovery actions.
9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems
Table 9-7 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems
No. Symptom Check item Action Reference

1 Machine power 1. Is operation panel Replace panel cable. "4.2.2
cannot be turned ON unit assembly cable Removing
broken or shorted? Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
2. Panel unit assembly Replace panel unit "4.2.2
may be damaged. assembly. Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
3. Inlet assembly may Replace inlet assembly. "4.3.8
be defective. Replacing
Inlet
Assembly"
p.4-41
4. Power board Replace power board "4.3.6
defective. Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-30

Table 9-7 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems (Continued)

2 Abnormal LCD 1. Check panel cable for Reconnect following "4.3.3
operation (no proper connection at connectors. Replacing
displays/garbled operation panel unit • Main board: J5 Main Board
characters) assembly side and • Operation panel unit Assembly"
main board assembly assembly p.4-29
side.
• Is the panel cable
inserted obliquely?
• Is the connector
securely locked?
2. Panel cable may be Replace panel cable. "4.2.2
damaged. Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
3. Is operation panel Replace panel board "4.2.2
unit assembly LCD assembly. Removing
damaged? Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
4. Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3.3
may be damaged. assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
5. Power board Replace power board "4.3.6
damaged. Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
9-31 AP-74109 Rev 1.1


3 Initial ink charge not 1. Is "Sen: Cover open" • Check connection of "4.8.3
available displayed on LCD cover sensor assembly Replacing
with front cover connector. Cover Sensor
closed? • Replace cover sensor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-85
2. Check panel cable for Reconnect following "4.3.3

proper connection at connectors. Replacing
operation panel unit • Main board Main Board
assembly side and assembly: J5 Assembly"
main board assembly • Operation panel unit p.4-29
side. assembly
• Is the panel cable
inserted obliquely?
• Is the connector
securely locked?
3. Is "Sen: Lever up" Adjust lever sensor. "4.5.4
displayed on LCD Replacing T
with media set lever Fence" p.4-
lowered? 55
4. Check main board • Reconnect the "4.3.3
assembly connectors connector. Replacing
J30 for proper • Replace lever sensor Main Board
connection. assembly. Assembly"
p.4-29
5. Main board assembly • Replace main board "4.3.3
• After replacement, Main Board
execute initial ink Assembly"
charge from “Check8: p.4-29
Parameter” -
“Parameter2: Update” -
"Update1: Head Rank"
of self-diagnosis
function.
4 Though initial charge Is spring of ink system • If the part is detached, "4.7.2
has started, ink does assembly detached or remount it. Replacing
not reach head. damaged? • If the part is damaged, Maintenance
replace ink system Assembly"
assembly. p.4-76
5 Though ink reaches Is capping position • If ink inflow is Operation

head, ink is not appropriate? confirmed, execute Manual
discharged from head. initial ink charge.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-32


6 Ink is not discharged 1. Are damper • Remove head cover "4.2.1
though ink charge is assembly, ink tube and check damper Removing R
finished. and SUS pipe joint assembly. Side Cover"
screws (K, Y, M, C) • Remove side cover (L, R) p.4-6
securely tightened? and cartridge cover, and "4.2.3
Is O-ring properly check ink tube and SUS Removing L
installed? pipe joint screws. Side Cover"
p.4-10
"4.2.4
Removing
Ink Holder (I/
H) Cover"
p.4-12
2. Does shield part of • Replace damper "4.6.1
damper assembly assembly and check if Replacing
have air leak? cleaning operation Print Head"
causes ink inflow. p.4-61
• If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
3. Is ink tube in ink • Replace ink system "4.7.2
system assembly assembly and check if Replacing
bent? cleaning operation Maintenance
causes ink inflow. Assembly"
• If ink inflow is p.4-76
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
4. Does pump motor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
rotate during assembly connector Replacing
cleaning operation? J22, J23. Main Board
• Replace pump motor. Assembly"
p.4-29
• Replace main board "4.7.1
assembly. Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-71
5. When cleaning Replace maintenance base "4.7.1
operation is assembly. Removing
performed, are gears Maintenance
damaged or poorly Base
engaged? Assembly"
p.4-71
9-33 AP-74109 Rev 1.1


6 Ink is not discharged 6. When cleaning Replace maintenance base "4.7.1
though ink charge is operation is assembly. Removing
finished. performed, is Maintenance
transmission gear Base
shaft damaged? Assembly"
p.4-71
7. Does ink tube have • Replace damaged ink "4.10.2
bend, scratch, or tube and check if Replacing
leak? cleaning operation Ink Tube"
causes ink inflow after p.4-93
each replacement.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Check connection of Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
head cable Replacing
connectors on CR Print Head"
board assembly side p.4-61
and head side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable inserted Replacing
obliquely? CR Board
Assembly"
• Is it locked securely? p.4-91
9. Is head cable Replace head cable. "4.6.1
broken? Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
"4.10.1
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
10. Is print head Replace print head "4.6.1
assembly damaged? assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
11. Is CR board Replace CR board "4.10.1
assembly damaged? assembly. Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-34


6 Ink is not discharged 12. Check connection of Reconnect following "4.10.1
though ink charge is CR cable connectors connectors. Replacing
finished. on CR board • CR board assembly CR Board
assembly side and connector: J201 - J205 Assembly"
main board assembly • Main board assembly p.4-91
side. connector: J9 - J11 "4.3.3
• Is head cable inserted Replacing
obliquely? Main Board
Assembly"
13. Is CR cable broken? Replace CR cable. "4.10.3
Replacing
CR Tape
Wire" p.4-97
may be defective. assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
7 Machine makes no 1. Is "Sen: Cover open" • Check main board "4.3.3
operations after displayed on LCD assembly connector Replacing
turned ON. with printer cover J38, J40. Main Board
closed? • Replace cover sensor Assembly"
Or, is cover sensor assembly. p.4-29
assembly function "4.8.3
detected as normal Replacing
when checked Cover Sensor
through "Sen4: Assembly"
Cover" of self- p.4-85
diagnosis function?
8 After turned ON, 2. Check panel cable Reconnect following "4.3.3
machine displays connectors at connectors. Replacing
"Initializing" and operation panel unit • Main board Main Board
resets itself. assembly and main assembly: J5 Assembly"
board assembly. • Operation panel unit p.4-29
• Is panel cable assembly: J1
inserted obliquely?
• Is it locked securely?
9-35 AP-74109 Rev 1.1


9 Machine does not 3. Is "Set media" • Check main board "4.3.3
perform initialization displayed on LCD assembly connector Replacing
even if media is set. with pressure arm J30. Main Board
lowered? • Replace lever sensor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-29
"4.5.3
Replacing
Lever
Sensor" p.4-
54
10 Machine does not 4. Is P_REAR sensor • Check main board "4.3.3
start operation even if assembly judged as assembly connector Replacing
front cover is closed. normal when J42. Main Board
checked through • Replace P_REAR Assembly"
"Sen7: Rear" of self- sensor Assembly. p.4-29
diagnosis function? "4.9.2
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-90
11 Machine does not stop 5. Is DC cable assembly • Reconnect DC cable "4.3.6
even if front cover is connected correctly assembly. Replacing
opened. between power board • Replace DC cable Power Board
assembly and main assembly. Assembly"
board assembly? p.4-35
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
7. Power board may be Replace power board "4.3.6
defective. assembly. Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-36


12 Ink cartridge cannot Are ink sensor and • Follow the steps for the "(1) Head
be detected even if JUNCTION board message "[KCMY] No Rank" p.5-57
installed. assembly works Cartridge".
normally? • After adjustment/
replacement, execute
initial ink charge from
"Adj: Input Rank" of
self-diagnosis function.
8. Is specified cartridge • Follow the steps for the "(1) Head
status detected as message "Insert Rank" p.5-57
normal when specified cartridge".
checked through "Ink • After adjustment/
Not" of self- replacement, execute
diagnosis function initial ink charge from
with specified “Check8: Parameter” -
cartridge securely “Parameter2: Update” -
inserted? "Update1: Head Rank"
of self-diagnosis
function.
13 Operation panel 1. Is operation panel Replace operation panel -
accepts no inputs. cover broken or cover.
contaminated?
2. Check panel cable Reconnect following "4.3.3
connectors at connectors. Replacing
operation panel unit • Main board Main Board
assembly side and assembly: J5 Assembly"
main board assembly • Operation panel unit p.4-29
side. assembly: J1
• Is panel cable
inserted obliquely?
• Is it locked securely?
3. Operation panel unit Replace panel unit "4.2.2
assembly may be assembly. Removing
damaged. Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
may be assembly. Replacing
malfunctioning. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
9-37 AP-74109 Rev 1.1


14 Machine prints Refer to ""9.3.5 Online - "9.3.5
nothing though it Function Problems" Online
receives data. p.9-62". Function
Problems"
p.9-62
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-38

9.3.2 Media Feed Problems
Table 9-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems

1 Media comes off 1. Are P_REAR sensor • Check following "4.3.3
during media set assembly and connectors. Replacing
initialization or P_EDGE sensor • Main board Main Board
printing. assembly detected as assembly: J42, J9 - Assembly"
normal when J11 p.4-29
checked through "4.10.1
"Sen6: Edge AD" • CR board assembly: Replacing
and “Sen7: Rear” of J208, J201 - J203 CR Board
self-diagnosis • Replace P_REAR Assembly"
function? sensor assembly and p.4-91
P_EDGE sensor "4.9.2
assembly. Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-90
"4.6.2
Replacing
Cutter
Holder
Assembly"
p.4-66
2 Media runs obliquely 2. Is suction fan run as • Check connection of "4.9.1
or meanders during normal when following main board Replacing
media set checked through assembly connectors. Suction Fan
initialization or "Test6: Fan" - “Fan1: • Suction fan cable Assembly"
printing. Vacum Fan” of self- assembly: J25 - J29 p.4-89
diagnosis function?
assembly.
• Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate normally.
3 Media crinkles during
media set
initialization or
printing.
4 Media jams during 3. When pressure lever Lubricate pressure cam. "8.4
media set is moved backward Lubrication/
initialization or and forward, does Bonding"
printing. pressure assembly p.8-7
move smoothly in
synchronization with
it?
9-39 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 9-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems (Continued)

5 Media is torn during 4. Does pressure roller If pressure roller collects Operation
media set drag when pressure media dust on itself, wipe Manual
initialization or lever is raised? dust away using a wet soft
printing. cloth.
5. Does media guide • If media guide collects
have large distortion media dust or other
or foreign objects? foreign objects on it, "4.2.8
remove them. Removing
• Replace media guide. Media Guide
R2" p.4-17
6. When using roll Insert flanges correctly into Operation
media, are flanges core pipe of media roll. Manual
attached correctly?
6 Machine registers Is media in use a Set recommended media Operation
wrong media size recommended one? and check printout again. Manual
after media set With non-authorized
initialization. media, media sensor may
fail to detect media
correctly.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-40

9.3.3 Printing Problems

Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems
1 Machine cannot print 1. printer driver may be Update printer driver. "7.3.5
sequentially. defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
2. Program ROM may be Update firmware. "7.3.5
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
2 Media feed after 1. Is P_REAR sensor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
printing is excessive. assembly judged as assembly connector J42. Replacing
normal when checked • Replace P_REAR sensor Main Board
through "Test7: Rear" assembly. Assembly"
of self-diagnosis p.4-29
function? "4.9.2
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-90
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
9-41 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems (Continued)
3 Missing dots in 1. Is cleaning enough? Perform cleaning twice Operation
printing. consecutively. Manual
2. Is ink tube filled with Perform little ink charge. Operation
ink? Manual
3. Perform "Check4: If the nozzle check patterns "5.7.8 Test
Adjustment" - “Adj.1: are printed correctly, refer to Printing
NozzleChk” or the action in check item No. Menu" p.5-43
“Check6: Print” of 4.
printer self-diagnosis
or "Test Print".
rotate during cleaning assembly connector J22, Replacing
operation? J23. Main Board
• Replace Pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-29
"4.7.1
• Replace main board Removing
assembly. Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-71
5. Are gears and Replace maintenance base "4.7.1

transmission gear shaft assembly. Removing
damaged or poorly Maintenance
engaged during Base
cleaning operation? Assembly"
p.4-71
4 Nozzle plugging or ink 1. Is spring of ink system • If the part is detached,
splash is not eliminated assembly detached or remount it.
even after cleaning. damaged? • If the part is damaged, "4.7.2
replace ink system Replacing
Assembly"
p.4-76
2. Check cleaning wiper • Wipe cleaning wiper Operation
condition. surface with accessory Manual
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
• If cleaning wiper is
sticky with ink, replace it "4.7.3
with a new one. Replacing
Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-77
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-42

4 Nozzle plugging or ink 3. Is nozzle face wiped/ Check wiper installation "4.7.3
splash is not eliminated rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Replacing
even after cleaning. correctly. Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-77
4. Is registered head rank Enter correct head rank. "(1) Head
different from actual Rank" p.5-57
head rank?
5. Does residual ink Clean head as follows. "5.7.9
collect on print head 1. Clean head from HeadWash
assembly or in "Check4: Adjustment" - Menu" p.5-44
nozzles? “Adj 9: HeadWash” of
printer self-diagnosis. "(1) Head
2. Perform initial ink Rank" p.5-57
charge from “Check8:
Parameter” -
"Update1: Head Rank".
3. Check printouts again.
6. Check if CR_ENC • If they contact with each
assembly and other, adjust CR_ENC
T fence contact with assembly and T fence
each other. positions.
• If problem remains even "4.10.1
after position Replacing CR
adjustment, replace CR Board
board assembly and T Assembly"
fence. p.4-91
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-55
system assembly bent? assembly and check if Replacing
cleaning operation Maintenance
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head. "4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
9-43 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5 No printing. 1. Check power supply Replace power board "4.3.6
Particular color is voltage (DC24, assembly. Replacing
missing. DC42V). Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
2. Is spring of ink system • If the part is detached, "4.7.2
assembly detached or remount it. Replacing
damaged? • If the part is damaged, Maintenance
assembly. p.4-76
3. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect main board "4.3.3
obliquely? assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly Main Board
connectors J201 - J205. Assembly"
p.4-29
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
4. CR cable may be Replace CR cable assembly. "4.10.3
damaged. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-97
5. Are damper assembly, • Remove head cover and
ink tube and SUS pipe check damper assembly.
joint screws (K, C, M, • Remove side cover (L, "4.2.1
Y) securely tightened? R) and I/H cover, and Removing R
Is O-ring properly check ink tube and SUS Side Cover"
installed? pipe joint screws. p.4-6
"4.2.3
Removing L
Side Cover"
p.4-10
6. Does shield part of • Replace damper
damper have air leak? assembly and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-44

5 No printing. 8. Does ink tube have • Replace damaged ink "4.10.2
Particular color is bend, scratch, or leak? tube and check if Replacing Ink
missing. cleaning operation Tube" p.4-93
causes ink inflow after
each replacement.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
9. Are ink sensor and • Follow the steps for the "(1) Head
JUNCTION board message "[KCMY] No Rank" p.5-57
assembly works Cartridge".
normally? • After adjustment/
replacement, execute
initial ink charge from
“Check8: Parameter” -
of self-diagnosis
function.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
rotate during cleaning assembly connector J22, Replacing
operation? J23. Main Board
• Replace Pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-29
"4.7.1
• Replace main board Removing
Base
Assembly"
p.4-71
performed, does Maintenance
rotate properly? Assembly"
p.4-71
9-45 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

5 No printing. 13. When cleaning Replace maintenance base "4.7.1
Particular color is performed, is Maintenance
missing. transmission gear shaft Base
damaged? Assembly"
p.4-71
14. Check head cable Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
connectors at CR Replacing
board assembly side Print Head"
and print head p.4-61
assembly side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable inserted Replacing CR
obliquely? Board
Assembly"
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
16. CR board assembly Replace CR board assembly. "4.10.1
may be defective. Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-46

6 Machine outputs all 1. Check connection of Reconnect head cable. "4.6.1
black printing. head cable connectors Replacing
on CR board assembly Print Head"
side and print head p.4-61
side. "4.10.1
• Is head cable inserted Replacing CR
obliquely? Board
Assembly"
2. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect main board "4.3.3
obliquely? assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly Main Board
connectors J201 - J205. Assembly"
p.4-29
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
3. CR cable assembly Replace CR cable assembly. "4.10.3
may be damaged. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-97
4. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head "4.6.1
assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
may be Replacing CR
malfunctioning. Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
7 Blocky printing 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.4
quality. environment environment. Choosing a
8 Blocky image printing. appropriate? Place for the
9 CR line seems dotted. Printer" p.3-5
10 White or black lines
appear.
9-47 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7 Blocky printing 2. Have you started Printing just after initial Operation
quality. printing immediately charge may cause following Manual
8 Blocky image printing. after initial charge? symptoms.
9 CR line seems dotted. • Printed line blurs.
10 White or black lines • White lines appear.
appear.
In such cases, perform
cleaning two or three times
and check printout again.
If symptoms remain even
after cleaning, leave machine
unused for 1 hour or more.
Then perform cleaning again
and check printout.
If symptoms still remains,
refer to Operation Manual to
contact the technical support.
3. Is suction fan run as • Check connection of "4.9.1
normal when checked following main board Replacing
through “Check2: assembly connectors. Suction Fan
Test” - “Test5: Fan” of • Suction fan 1 - 4 Assembly"
self-diagnosis assembly: J25 - 29 p.4-89
function?
assembly.
• Replace cable of suction
fan that does not operate
normally.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-48

7 Blocky printing 4. Is shielding material Remount it at specified "4.9.1
quality. secured at specified position. Replacing
8 Blocky image printing. position? Suction Fan
9 CR line seems dotted. Assembly"
10 White or black lines p.4-89
appear.
5. If the media in Adjust roll receiver assembly "4.2.9
problem is roll media, position. Replace roll Removing
does scroller rotate receiver assembly. Scroller
evenly? Receiver (L,
R)" p.4-18
6. Is PF belt tension Adjust PF reduction belt "(3)
adjusted to tension. Confirming
specification? Completion of
Installation to
Printer" p.7-
26
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
• If cleaning wiper is
sticky with ink, replace it
with a new one.
8. Is nozzle face wiped/ Check wiper installation "4.7.3
rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Replacing
correctly. Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-77
9. Is T fence • Clean T fence.
contaminated? • If T fence is still
contaminated or "4.5.4
damaged, replace T Replacing T
fence. Fence" p.4-55
10. Does pressure roller If pressure roller collects Operation

rotate harder when media dust on itself, wipe Manual
pressure arm is raised? dust away using a wet soft
cloth.
9-49 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

7 Blocky printing 11. Does pump motor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
quality. rotate during cleaning assembly connector J22, Replacing
8 Blocky image printing. operation? J23. Main Board
9 CR line seems dotted. • Replace pump motor Assembly"
10 White or black lines assembly. p.4-29
appear. "4.7.1
Removing
• Replace main board Maintenance
assembly. Base
Assembly"
p.4-71
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
performed, does Maintenance
rotate properly? Assembly"
p.4-71
and transmission gear Base
p.4-71
assembly. p.4-76
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
16. Is registered head Enter correct head voltage. "(1) Head
voltage different from Rank" p.5-57
actual head voltage?
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-50

7 Blocky printing 17. Does residual ink Clean head as follows.
quality. collect on head 1. Clean head through
8 Blocky image printing. assembly or in "Adj 9: HeadWash" of "5.7.9
9 CR line seems dotted. nozzles? self-diagnosis function. HeadWash
10 White or black lines 2. Perform initial charge Menu" p.5-44
appear. through "Adjustment:
Voltage input".
3. Check plotouts again. "(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
may be Replacing CR
Assembly"
p.4-91
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
9-51 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

11 Printout borders blur. 1. Does purge correct Perform purge twice Operation
symptom? consecutively. Manual
2. Is media in use a Set recommended media and Operation
recommended one? check printout again. With Manual
non-authorized media, media
sensor may fail to detect
media correctly.
3. CR cable assembly Replace CR cable assembly "4.10.3
may be damaged. wire. Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-97
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
may be Replacing CR
Assembly"
p.4-91
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
12 Many satellites 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.4
(unnecessary dots) environment environment. Choosing a
appropriate? Place for the
Shaggy plotout Printer" p.3-5
2. Is the ink level Replace ink cartridge with Operation
Uneven lines (plotted
remained sufficient? new one. Manual
with stains)
3. Perform purge three Plot out drawing again. Operation
times consecutively. Manual
4. Perform test printing. If nozzle check patterns are
plotted correctly, refer to step
(6)
5. Have you started Be sure to wait 6 hours or Operation
plottout immediately more after initial ink charge. Manual
after initial charge? Plotout before ink charge
stabilization will not provide
adequate plotting quality.
6. Is CR belt tension Adjust CR belt tension. "7.6 CR
adjusted to Belt Tension
specification? Adjustment"
p.7-35
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-52

12 Many satellites 7. Check if PF_ENC • If they contact with each
(unnecessary dots) assembly and T fence other, adjust CR_ENC
contact with each assembly and T fence
Shaggy plotout other. positions.
• If problem remains even "4.10.1
Uneven lines (plotted after position Replacing CR
with stains) adjustment, replace CR Board
board assembly and T Assembly"
fence. p.4-91
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-55
cleaning wiper cleaning
cloth dampened with
small amount of purified
water. After wiping
cleaning wiper, perform
cleaning twice
consecutively. "4.7.3
• If cleaning wiper is Replacing
sticky with ink, replace it Cleaner Head
with a new one. (Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-77
9. Is nozzle face wiped/ Check wiper installation "4.7.3
rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Replacing
correctly. Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-77
9-53 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

12 Many satellites 11. Does pump motor • Reconnect main board "4.3.3
(unnecessary dots) rotate during cleaning assembly connector J22 Replacing
operation? 　and J23. Main Board
Shaggy plotout • Replace pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-29
with stains) • Replace main board "4.7.1
assembly. Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-71
and transmission gear Base
p.4-71
assembly. p.4-76

confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
15. Does residual ink Clean head as follows.
collect on print head 1) Clean head from "5.7.9
assembly or in “Check4: Adjustment” - HeadWash
nozzles? “Adj 9: HeadWash” of Menu" p.5-44
printer self-diagnosis.
2) Perform initial ink "5.7.5
charge from “Check8: Voltage
Parameter” - Adjustment"
“Parameter2: Update” - p.5-33
of printer self-diagnosis.
3) Check printouts again.
16. Is print head assembly Replace damaged print head "4.6.1
damaged? assembly. Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-54

12 Many satellites 17. Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3.3
(unnecessary dots) may be damaged. assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Shaggy plotout Assembly"
p.4-29
with stains)
13 Mixed color lines are 1. Is CR belt tension Adjust CR belt tension. "7.6 CR
not overlaid. adjusted to Belt Tension
p.7-35
3. Is head slant Adjust head slant. "7.6 CR
inappropriate? Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-35
4. Are Bi-Directional Align Bi-Directional printing "5.7.6 Uni-
printing positions positions. D / Bi-D Low
aligned correctly? and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36
5. Is CW adjustment Perform CW adjustment. "5.7.6 Uni-
inappropriate? D / Bi-D Low
and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36
14 Black and other colors Check if CR_ENC • If they contact with each
do not align. assembly and T fence other, adjust CR_ENC
contact with each other. assembly and T fence
positions. "4.10.1
• If problem remains even Replacing CR
after position Board
adjustment, replace CR Assembly"
board assembly and T p.4-91
fence. "4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-55
9-55 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

15 Poor accuracy of 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.4
segment length in head environment environment. Choosing a
travel direction (main appropriate? Place for the
scan direction). Printer" p.3-5
p.7-35
3. Is T fence • Clean T fence.
contaminated? • If T fence is still "4.5.4
contaminated or Replacing T
damaged, replace T Fence" p.4-55
fence.
4. Internal process of Initialize parameters and "5.11.1
main board assembly reenter or modify them. Parameter
may be abnormal. Then, check machine Initialization
operation again. Menu" p.5-53
16 Poor linearity in head 1. Is suction fan run as • Check connection of "4.9.1
scan direction normal when checked following main board Replacing
(straightness) through “Check2: assembly connectors. Suction Fan
Test” - “Test5: Fan” of • Suction 1 - 4 cable: Assembly"
self-diagnosis J25 - J29 p.4-89
function?
assembly.
normally.
2. Is PF driving pulley Replace PF motor assembly. "4.4.1
loose? Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-44
3. Is PF speed reduction Adjust PF speed reduction "(3)
belt tension adjusted to belt tension. Confirming
Installation to
Printer" p.7-
26
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-56

16 Poor linearity in head 4. If the media in • Adjust roll receiver "4.2.9
scan direction problem is roll media, assembly position. Removing
(straightness) does scroller rotate • Replace roll receiver Scroller
evenly? assembly. Receiver (L,
R)" p.4-18
cloth.
17 Poor accuracy of 1. Is working Use machine under specified "3.4
segment length in environment environment. Choosing a
media feed direction appropriate? Place for the
(sub scan direction) Printer" p.3-5
2. Is PF driving pulley Replace PF motor assembly. "4.4.1
loose? Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-44
3. Is PF belt tension Adjust PF speed reduction "(3)
adjusted to belt tension. Confirming
Installation to
Printer" p.7-
26
cloth.
5. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated Operation
roller partially worn with media dust, clean roller Manual
out? with a nylon brush.
6. Is grid roller rotation
heavy? Does rattling
occur when it rotates?
7. If the media in Adjust roll receiver assembly "4.2.9
problem is roll media, position. Removing
does scroller rotate Replace roll receiver Scroller
evenly? assembly. Receiver (L,
Change media to be used. R)" p.4-18
9-57 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

18 Poor linearity in media 1. Is registered head Enter correct head voltage. "(1) Head
feed direction (media voltage different from Rank" p.5-57
splicing accuracy) actual head voltage?
2. Adjust head slant. Adjust head slant. "7.6 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-35
p.7-35
4. Are Bi-Directional Align two-way printing "5.7.6 Uni-
printing positions positions. D / Bi-D Low
aligned correctly? and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36
5. Is T fence Clean T fence. "4.5.4
contaminated? If T fence is still Replacing T
contaminated or damaged, Fence" p.4-55
replace T fence.
6. Check if vertical lines Replace steel bearer "4.10.3
plotted from “Check4: assembly. Replacing CR
Adjustment” - “Adj 3: Tape Wire"
HeadSlant” are not p.4-97
connected even though
nozzle check pattern
from “Check4:
Adjustment” - “Adj 1:
NozzleChk” of self-
diagnosis function is
adjusted properly.
7. Is carriage assembly Replace carriage assembly. -
loose?
19 Poor right angle 1. Is suction fan judged • Check connection of "4.9.1
accuracy as normal when following maintenance Replacing
checked through board assembly Suction Fan
“Test6: Fan” - “Fan1: connectors. Assembly"
Vacum Fan” of self- • Suction fan 1 - 4 p.4-89
diagnosis function? assembly: J25 - J29
assembly.
normally.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-58

19 Poor right angle 2. Does pressure roller If pressure roller collects Operation
accuracy rotate harder when media dust on itself, wipe Manual
cloth.
3. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated Operation
roller partially worn with media dust, clean roller Manual
out? with a nylon brush.
9.3.4 Noise Problems

Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems
1 Abnormal noise is 1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and "4.9.1
heard when media is objects or obstacles foreign objects. Replacing
suctioned. around rotating fin of Suction Fan
suction fan assembly? Assembly"
p.4-89
2. Check damage of If damaged, replace damaged -
cables and connection part.
of connectors.
3. Suction fan assembly Replace suction fan "4.9.1
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-89
malfunctioning. Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-89
5. Power board assembly Replace power board "4.3.6
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
9-59 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
2 Abnormal noise in 1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and -
waiting mode objects or obstacles at foreign objects.
noise-generating
position?
2. Is abnormal noise Replace applicable one of the "4.3.6
heard from board? following board assemblies. Replacing
• Power board assembly Power Board
• Main board assembly Assembly"
p.4-35
• CR board assembly "4.3.3
• Print head assembly Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
3 Abnormal noise is 1. Does customer Explain machine operations. -
heard while head is recognize ink
moving laterally. discharge noise as
abnormal noise?
2. Is abnormal noise Additionally tighten screws. "4.2
caused by loose screw Removal of
in covers? Covers" p.4-5
3. Is rattling noise heard • Remove dust from -
when moving carriage carriage bearing and
laterally? roller strip.
• After cleaning roller
strip, always apply thin
lubricant film over its
surface using a grease-
sprayed cloth.
4. Is abnormal noise • Remove twists from CR "4.10.3
heard from CR cable? cable. Replacing CR
• If abnormal noise sounds Tape Wire"
from between steel p.4-97
bearer and tube guide,
replace tube guide.
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-60

Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
3 Abnormal noise is 5. Does the cable • If they contact with each "4.10.3
heard while head is connected to CR board other, adjust mounting Replacing CR
moving laterally. assembly on carriage positions of the parts. Tape Wire"
contact with CR • If problem remains even p.4-97
cover? after position
adjustment, replace the
parts.
6. Is abnormal noise Replace it. "4.5.5
heard from CR driven Replacing CR
pulley bearing? Driven Pulley
and CR belt"
p.4-58
p.7-35
8. Is abnormal noise Replace CR motor assembly. "4.5.1 CR
heard from CR motor Motor
assembly? Assembly"
p.4-51
4 Abnormal noise is 1. Is PF speed reduction Replace PF speed reduction "4.4.1
heard during media belt slipping between belt. Replacing PF
feeding. PF speed reduction Motor
pulleys? Assembly"
p.4-44
2. Is abnormal noise Replace PF motor assembly. "4.4.1
heard from PF motor Replacing PF
assembly? Motor
Assembly"
p.4-44
3. Is rough surface of If grid roller is contaminated Operation
grid roller partially with media dust, clean roller Manual
worn out? with a nylon brush.
9-61 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

9.3.5 Online Function Problems

Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems
No. Event/symptom Check item Action Reference
1 USB interface cannot 1. Does computer in use Windows95 does not support -
establish support USB? USB officially. If you use
communication. Windows95, use computer
with Windows98 or higher
OS installed.
2. Does the same error Use another USB port on the -
occur even if you use computer.
another USB port on
the computer?
3. Are you using USB • Cascade connection -
hub? using USB hub is
available up to 5 stages.
• If the printer operates
normally without using
USB hub, replace USB
hub.
• Instruct users to use USB
hubs compliant with
USB2.0 Hi-Speed
standard.
4. Attempt Replace USB cable. -
communication with
PC on hand.
5. Does the same error Communication error may -
occur even if interface be caused by an open circuit
cable is changed? in interface cable or too long
cable length. Instruct users to
use cables compliant with
USB2.0 Hi-Speed standard.
6. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. -
defective.
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
2 Scaling does not work 1. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. Operation
correctly. defective. Manual
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-62

Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems (Continued)
3 Mirror function does 2. Program ROM may be Update firmware. "7.3.5
not work correctly. defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
4 Other functions do not 3. Main board assembly Replace main board "4.3.3
work correctly. may be damaged. assembly. Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
5 Printing position is 1. Is CW adjustment Perform adjustment. "5.7.6 Uni-
incorrect. inappropriate? D / Bi-D Low
and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36
2. Is adjustment of top/ Perform adjustment. "7.11.2
bottom margin P_REAR
distance inappropriate Sensor
between front sensor Adjustment"
and head and between p.7-48
cutter and head?
3. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. Operation
defective. Manual
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
9-63 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

6 Some data are not 1. Printer driver may be Update printer driver. Operation
printed (missing). defective. Manual
Some data change to 2. Program ROM may be Update firmware. "7.3.5

7
garbage. defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
3. Is T fence • If grease or dust collect:
contaminated or worn Wipe fence with a dry
out? cloth.
• If ink deposit presents:
Wipe it off with cloth
dampened with neutral
detergent.
• If contamination or "4.5.4
deposit is too heavy: Replacing T
Replace T fence. Fence" p.4-55
4. Check “CR Encoder” • Move carriage in both "4.3.3
from “Test5: Encoder” directions and check the Replacing
of “Check2: Test” of numeral value on LCD. Main Board
self-diagnosis If the numeral value Assembly"
function. doesn't change normally, p.4-29
check main board
assembly connector J12. "4.5.4
• Replace T fence. Replacing T
Fence" p.4-55
• Replace CR motor
assembly.
"4.5.1 CR
• Replace CR board Motor
assembly. Assembly"
p.4-51
"4.10.1
• Replace CR cable. Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-97
malfunctioning. Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-64

8 Media feed after 1. Are print start position Reinstall or update printer Operation
printout is excessive. and layout method set driver. Manual
properly?
2. Printer driver setting • Modify the value to an Operation
may be unsuitable. appropriate value (Media Manual
size).
• Update printer driver.
defective. Firmware
Installation"
p.7-21
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
9.3.6 Other Problems

Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions
1 Machine hangs up. 1. Internal process of Initialize parameters and "7.3.1
main board assembly reenter or modify them. Parameter
may be abnormal. Backup" p.7-
12
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-29
9-65 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions (Continued)

2 Machine power is shut 1. Is power cable Check by a circuit tester. -
off during printing. shorted?
2. Is there any electric Check for short to chassis -
leakage? ground due to damaged cable
insulation.
3. Check power supply Replace power board "4.3.6
voltage (AC100V). assembly. Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
voltage (DC5V). assembly. Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
voltage (DC24V, assembly. Replacing
DC42V). Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
6. Check power board Replace power board "4.3.6
assembly. assembly. Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-35
3 Ink cartridge cannot be 1. Is pointer of ink sensor Replace ink sensor assembly. "4.8.1
inserted. assembly deformed or Replacing Ink
damaged? Holder (I/H)
Assembly"
p.4-79
2. Is ink NOT sensor Replace ink sensor assembly. "4.8.1
(black resin lever Replacing Ink
switch) of ink sensor Holder (I/H)
assembly damaged? Assembly"
p.4-79
4 Ink spills out of waste 1. Check inside of waste Replace waste ink absorber -
fluid box. fluid box. sheet.
2. Is waste fluid tube Reinstall it.
coming out of flushing
box bent?
5 Ink spills out of 1. Is flushing box Remove dust. -
flushing box. clogged with dust?
2. Is waste fluid tube Reinstall waste fluid tube.
coming out of flushing
box bent?
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-66

Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions (Continued)

6 Ink spills around X rail. 1. Extension tube may be • Remove maintenance "4.7.1
disconnected under ink base assembly and check Removing
system assembly. if extension tube is Maintenance
connected. Base
• Replace pump motor Assembly"
assembly. p.4-71
"4.7.2
• Replace ink system Replacing
Assembly"
p.4-76
2. Ink tube may be cut. Replace ink tube. "4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-76
3. Print head, main board After removing ink cartridge, "4.3.3
assembly and CR check if each board operates Replacing
board assembly may properly. Main Board
be defective. Assembly"
p.4-29
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-61
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-91
9.3.7 Troubleshooting For A Dedicated Network Software

You can use either of the following dedicated network software. Refer the directed page depending on the
software you use.
• MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant

• MUTOH Service Assistance
9-67 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(1) Troubleshooting For MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant

Table 9-13 Troubleshooting for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant
1 MUTOH Maintenance - Re-install the software and "(1)
Engineer Assistant does configure initial settings. Installing
not executed. MUTOH
Maintenance
Engineer
Assistant" p.7-
12
2 "Communication Error 1. Is printer connected to Yes: Go to item (2). "(7)
(Timeout)" is displayed PC with LAN cable No: Connect printer to PC Connecting
while transferring data. properly? (Use properly. Printer to PC"
crossing cable for p.7-17
direct connection to
PC. Use straight cable
for connection routing
HUB.)
2. Is IP address of PC Yes: Go to item (3). "(6) PC IP
correct? No: Set TCP/IP property Address
in the local area settings of Setting" p.7-15
network configuration on
PC. PC and printer's sub
net address should be
specified the same
address, such as
192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253.
3. Is any device which Yes: Disconnect -
has a same IP address corresponding device(s)
as PC or printer from the LAN.
connected to HUB? No: Go to item (4).
4. Is printer power on Yes: Go to item (5). "(8)
using board manager No: Turn on the printer Starting Board
mode and only Power using board manager Manager
LED is ON? mode. If no string is Mode" p.7-18
displayed on the LCD
panel, the Engine board
assembly is damaged or
the firmware may not be
installed (including black
out while installing
firmware).
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-68

Table 9-13 Troubleshooting for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant (Continued)

2 "Communication Error 5. Is IP address of printer Yes: Go to item (6). "4.3.3
(Timeout)" is displayed correct? (Follow the No: Turn on the printer Replacing
while transferring data. procedures in 6.3 to using board manager Main Board
confirm the mode. If no string is Assembly"
information). displayed on the LCD p.4-29
panel, the Engine board "7.3.5
assembly is damaged or Firmware
the firmware may not be Installation"
installed (including black p.7-21
out while installing
firmware).
6. Can PC communicate Yes: Connect PC to other -
with other LAN device(s) with LAN cable
device(s) through the and type ping command to
network? confirm the connection is
linked.
No: PC may be damaged.
3 "Error is received (???): Firmware file size is too Short-period buzzer "7.3.5
Buffer overflow." is large. Confirm that the sounds repeatedly and Firmware
displayed. transferred firmware is a LCD panel displays the Installation"
correct one. following messages while p.7-21
LEDs for Roll Paper / Cut
Paper, Color /
Monochrome flashes at
the same time.
Transfer failed
Data format error
Press any key other than
Power button to stop the
buzzer sound.
Power button again to set
the printer for firmware
installation status.
4 "Transfer failed A MAIN board assembly Install the firmware while "(1)
incompatible F/W" is with the firmware of other setting the DIP SW (SW3- Setting DIP
displayed while printer is equipped to the 2) on the board to ON. Set SW on MAIN
transferring a appropriate printer. Confirm the DIP the SW to OFF after the board
firmware. SW setting on the board. installation. assembly" p.7-
21
9-69 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

(2) Troubleshooting For MUTOH Service Assistance

Table 9-14 Troubleshooting For MUTOH Service Assistance
No. Symptom Check Item Action Reference
1 MUTOH Maintenance - Re-install the software and "(1)
Engineer Assistant does configure initial settings. Installing
not executed. MUTOH
Service
Assistance"
p.3-31
2 "Packet communication 1. Is printer connected to Yes: Go to item (2). "(7)
error" is displayed while PC with LAN cable No: Connect printer to PC Connecting
transferring data. properly? (Use properly. Printer to PC"
crossing cable for p.7-17
direct connection to
PC. Use straight cable
for connection routing
HUB.)
2. Is IP address of PC Yes: Go to item (3). "(5)
correct? No: Set TCP/IP property Confirming IP
in the local area settings of Address of the
network configuration on Printer" p.7-
PC. PC and printer's sub 14
net address should be
specified the same
address, such as
192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253.
3. Is any device which Yes: Disconnect -
has a same IP address corresponding device(s)
as PC or printer from the LAN.
connected to HUB? No: Go to item (4).
4. Is printer power on Yes: Go to item (5). "4.3.3

using board manager No: Turn on the printer Replacing
mode and only Power using board manager Main Board
LED is ON? mode. If no string is Assembly"
displayed on the LCD p.4-29
panel, the Engine board "7.4 PF
assembly is damaged or Speed
the firmware may not be Reduction Belt
installed (including black Tension
out while installing Adjustment"
firmware). p.7-32
5. Is IP address of printer Yes: Go to item (6). "4.3.3

correct? (Follow the No: Engine board Replacing
procedures in 6.3 to assembly may be Main Board
confirm the damaged. Assembly"
information). p.4-29
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-70

Table 9-14 Troubleshooting For MUTOH Service Assistance (Continued)

No. Symptom Check Item Action Reference
2 "Packet communication 6. Can PC communicate Yes: Connect PC to other -
error" is displayed while with other LAN device(s) with LAN cable
transferring data. device(s) through the and type ping command to
network? confirm the connection is
linked.
No: PC may be damaged.
3 "Error is received (???): Firmware file size is too Short-period buzzer "7.4 PF
Buffer overflow." is large. Confirm that the sounds repeatedly and Speed
displayed. transferred firmware is a LCD panel displays the Reduction Belt
correct one. following messages while Tension
LEDs for Roll Paper / Cut Adjustment"
Paper, Color / p.7-32
Monochrome flashes at
the same time.
Transfer failed
Data format error
Power button to stop the
buzzer sound.
Power button again to set
the printer for firmware
installation status.
9-71 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 9-72

10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 10- 2
10.2 Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 10- 2
10.3 Jigs and Tools....................................................................................... 10- 3
10.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................. 10-3
10.4 Operation Panel Messages (Bilingual List) ........................................ 10- 4
10-1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides referential information such as service data and exploded views.
10.2 Wiring Diagram

For wiring diagram, see information below.
TIP
Separate sheet “Wiring Diagram” p.1
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 10-2

10.3 Jigs and Tools

This section provides lists of jigs and tools required for service operations.
10.3.1 Required Tools
(1) Tools for Part Replacement

Table 10-1 Tools for Part Replacement
No. Name Part number Remarks
1 Phillips driver No.2 Generic product More than 250mm shaft length is
recommended
2 Phillips driver No.2 Generic product Less than 50mm shaft length is
recommended
3 Phillips driver No.1 Generic product
4 Flat-head driver Generic product
5 Longnose plier Generic product
6 Tweezers Generic product
7 Hex wrench (opposite side: Optional stand Required only when disassembling legs
6mm) accessory (Generic
product)
8 Tube cutter Generic product Required when cutting the tube
(2) Tools for Adjustment

Table 10-2 Tools for Adjustment
No. Name Part number Remarks
1 Personal computer Generic product
2 Tension gauge Generic product Max. 10,000gf (100N) for measurement
3 Tension gauge Generic product Max. 5,000gf (50N) for measurement
10-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

10.4 Operation Panel Messages (Bilingual List)

TIP
"2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature" p.2-12
AP-74109 Rev 1.1 10-4

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 11-2

Mutoh 1324 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mutoh 1324 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mutoh 1324 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. For Users in Europe

2. For Users in the United States

3. Trademark Mentioned in this Manual

• No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

1 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. The warranty period is described in the warranty certificate.

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

About this Manual

1. Purpose and Target Readers

3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment

Indicates reference pages in this manual

4. Establishment Date of This Document

5. Firmware version covered by this document

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

General Table of Contents

1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.5 Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.4 Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2-3 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.2 Product Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.4 Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

4.2 Removal of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

4.11 Replacing accessory unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

4.12 Replacing Take up unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

2-5 AP-74109 Rev 1.1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

AP-74109 Rev 1.1 2-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

5.10 Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52